1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2018-12-28.17} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 9% 10% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 11% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 12% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 13% License, or (at your option) any later version. 14% 15% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 16% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 17% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 18% General Public License for more details. 19% 20% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 21% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 22% 23% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 24% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 25% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 26% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 27% 28% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 29% reports; you can get the latest version from: 30% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 31% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 32% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 33% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 34% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 35% 36% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 37% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 38% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 39% 40% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 41% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 42% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 43% tex foo.texi 44% texindex foo.?? 45% tex foo.texi 46% tex foo.texi 47% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 48% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 49% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 50% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 51% 52% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 53% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 54% full Texinfo distribution. 55% 56% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 57 58 59\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 60 61% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 62% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 63% they might have appeared in the input file name. 64\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 65 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 66 67% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 68% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 69\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 70 71\chardef\other=12 72 73% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 74% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 75\let\+ = \relax 76 77% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 78\let\ptexb=\b 79\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 80\let\ptexc=\c 81\let\ptexcomma=\, 82\let\ptexdot=\. 83\let\ptexdots=\dots 84\let\ptexend=\end 85\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 86\let\ptexexclam=\! 87\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 88\let\ptexgtr=> 89\let\ptexhat=^ 90\let\ptexi=\i 91\let\ptexindent=\indent 92\let\ptexinsert=\insert 93\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 94\let\ptexless=< 95\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 96\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 97\let\ptexplus=+ 98\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 99\let\ptexrbrace=\} 100\let\ptexslash=\/ 101\let\ptexsp=\sp 102\let\ptexstar=\* 103\let\ptexsup=\sup 104\let\ptext=\t 105\let\ptextop=\top 106{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 107 108% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 109% starts a new line in the output. 110\newlinechar = `^^J 111 112% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 113% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 114% 115\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 116 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 117\else 118 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 119\fi 120 121% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 122\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 123\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 124\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 125\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 126\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 127\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 128\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 129\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 130\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 131\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 132\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 133\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 134\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 135\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 136\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 137\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 138\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 139\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 140\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 141\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 142% 143\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 155% 156\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 157\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 158\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 159\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 161 162% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 163\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 164 165% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 166\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 167 168\chardef\dashChar = `\- 169\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 170\chardef\underChar = `\_ 171 172% Ignore a token. 173% 174\def\gobble#1{} 175 176% The following is used inside several \edef's. 177\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 178 179% Hyphenation fixes. 180\hyphenation{ 181 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 182 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 183 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 184 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 185 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 186 spell-ing spell-ings 187 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 188 wide-spread wrap-around 189} 190 191% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 192% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 193% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 194% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 195% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 196% 197\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 198\def\loggingall{% 199 \tracingstats2 200 \tracingpages1 201 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 202 \tracingparagraphs1 203 \tracingoutput1 204 \tracingmacros2 205 \tracingrestores1 206 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 207 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 208 \tracingscantokens1 209 \tracingifs1 210 \tracinggroups1 211 \tracingnesting2 212 \tracingassigns1 213 \fi 214 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 215 \errorcontextlines16 216}% 217 218% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 219% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 220% after all. 221% 222\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 223\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 224 225% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 226% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 227% 228\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 229 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 230\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 231 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 232\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 233 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 234 235% Output routine 236% 237 238% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 239% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 240% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 241% 242\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 243 244\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 245\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 246 247% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 248% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 249% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 250% 251% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 252% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 253% 254% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 255% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 256% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 257 258% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 259% mark before the section break, and one after. 260% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \lastchapterdefs, 261% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \lastsectiondefs. 262% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 263% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 264% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 265% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 266% 267% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 268\def\domark{% 269 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 270 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 271 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 272 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 273 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 274 \mark{% 275 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 276 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 277 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 278 }% 279} 280 281% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 282% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 283% 284% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 285% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 286% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 287% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 288% first @chapter. 289\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 290 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 291 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 292} 293\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 294\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 295 296% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 297\def\lastchapterdefs{} 298\def\lastsectiondefs{} 299\def\lastsection{} 300\def\prevchapterdefs{} 301\def\prevsectiondefs{} 302\def\lastcolordefs{} 303 304% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 305\newdimen\bindingoffset 306\newdimen\normaloffset 307\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 308 309% Main output routine. 310% 311\chardef\PAGE = 255 312\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 313 314\newbox\headlinebox 315\newbox\footlinebox 316 317% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 318% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer 319% and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written 320% to the auxiliary files. 321% 322\def\onepageout#1{% 323 \hoffset=\normaloffset 324 % 325 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 326 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 327 % 328 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 329 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 330 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 331 \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 332 % 333 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 334 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 335 % values in \headline and \footline. 336 % 337 % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter. 338 \ifcase1\topmark\fi 339 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 340 \ifcase0\firstmark\fi 341 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 342 % 343 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 344 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 345 % 346 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 347 \let\thischapterheading\thischapter 348 \else 349 % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank 350 % for the first page of a chapter. This is to prevent the chapter name 351 % being shown twice. 352 \def\thischapterheading{}% 353 \fi 354 % 355 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 356 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}% 357 % 358 {% 359 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 360 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 361 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 362 % before the \shipout runs. 363 % 364 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 365 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 366 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 367 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 368 % \entry{{\indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 369 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 370 % it needs to be 371 % {\code {{\backslashcurfont }acronym} 372 \shipout\vbox{% 373 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 374 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 375 % 376 \unvbox\headlinebox 377 \pagebody{#1}% 378 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 379 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 380 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 381 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 382 \vskip 24pt 383 \unvbox\footlinebox 384 \fi 385 % 386 }% end of \shipout\vbox 387 }% end of group with \indexdummies 388 \advancepageno 389 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 390} 391 392\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 393 394% Main part of page, including any footnotes 395\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 396{\catcode`\@ =11 397\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 398% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 399\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 400 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 401\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 402\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 403\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 404} 405 406 407% Argument parsing 408 409% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 410% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 411% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 412% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 413% 414\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 415\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 416 \def\argtorun{#2}% 417 \begingroup 418 \obeylines 419 \spaceisspace 420 #1% 421 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 422} 423 424{\obeylines % 425 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 426 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 427 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 428 }% 429} 430 431% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Also remove a @texinfoc 432% comment (see \scanmacro for details). Pass the result on to \argcheckspaces. 433\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 434\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovetexinfoc #1\texinfoc\ArgTerm} 435\def\argremovetexinfoc#1\texinfoc#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 436 437% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 438% 439% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 440% @end itemize @c foo 441% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 442% by \finishparsearg. 443% 444\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 445\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 446\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 447 \def\temp{#3}% 448 \ifx\temp\empty 449 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 450 \let\temp\finishparsearg 451 \else 452 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 453 \fi 454 % Put the space token in: 455 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 456} 457 458% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 459% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 460% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 461% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 462% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 463% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 464% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 465% 466% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 467% 468\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 469 470 471% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 472% 473% \parseargdef\foo{...} 474% is roughly equivalent to 475% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 476% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 477\def\parseargdef#1{% 478 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 479} 480\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 481 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 482 \def#1##1% 483} 484 485% Several utility definitions with active space: 486{ 487 \obeyspaces 488 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 489 490 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 491 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 492 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 493 % should produce a line of output anyway. 494 % 495 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 496 497 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 498 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 499 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 500 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 501} 502 503 504\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 505 506% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 507% 508% \envdef\foo{...} 509% \def\Efoo{...} 510% 511% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 512% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 513% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 514% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 515% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 516% 517% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 518% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 519% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 520% special case.) 521 522 523% At run-time, environments start with this: 524\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 525% initialize 526\let\thisenv\empty 527 528% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 529\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 530\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 531 532% Check whether we're in the right environment: 533\def\checkenv#1{% 534 \def\temp{#1}% 535 \ifx\thisenv\temp 536 \else 537 \badenverr 538 \fi 539} 540 541% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 542\def\badenverr{% 543 \errhelp = \EMsimple 544 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 545 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 546} 547\def\inenvironment#1{% 548 \ifx#1\empty 549 outside of any environment% 550 \else 551 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 552 \fi 553} 554 555% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 556% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 557% 558\parseargdef\end{% 559 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 560 \else 561 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 562 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 563 \csname E#1\endcsname 564 \endgroup 565 \fi 566} 567 568\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 569 570 571% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 572% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 573% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 574% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 575% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 576{\catcode`@ = 11 577 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 578 % if the definition is written into an index file. 579 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 580 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 581} 582 583% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 584\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 585 586% @* forces a line break. 587\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 588 589% @/ allows a line break. 590\let\/=\allowbreak 591 592% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 593\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 594 595% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 596\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 597 598% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 599\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 600 601% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 602% 603\def\onword{on} 604\def\offword{off} 605% 606\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 607 \def\temp{#1}% 608 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 609 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 610 \else 611 \errhelp = \EMsimple 612 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 613 \fi\fi 614} 615 616% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 617% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 618% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 619\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 620 621% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 622% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 623% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 624% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 625% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 626% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 627% the text is small, which looks bad. 628% 629% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 630% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 631% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 632% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 633% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 634% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 635% 636\newbox\groupbox 637\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 638% 639\envdef\group{% 640 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 641 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 642 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 643 \fi 644 \startsavinginserts 645 % 646 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 647 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 648 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 649 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 650 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 651 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 652 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 653 \comment 654} 655% 656% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 657% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 658% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 659% above. But it's pretty close. 660\def\Egroup{% 661 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 662 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 663 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 664 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 665 \egroup % End the \vtop. 666 \addgroupbox 667 \prevdepth = \dimen1 668 \checkinserts 669} 670 671\def\addgroupbox{ 672 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 673 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 674 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 675 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 676 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 677 % group, force a page break. 678 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 679 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 680 \page 681 \fi 682 \fi 683 \box\groupbox 684} 685 686% 687% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 688% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 689% 690\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 691group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 692where each line of input produces a line of output.} 693 694% @need space-in-mils 695% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 696 697\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 698 699\parseargdef\need{% 700 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 701 % paragraph. 702 \par 703 % 704 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 705 \dimen0 = #1\mil 706 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 707 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 708 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 709 % 710 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 711 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 712 % And a page break here is fine. 713 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 714 % 715 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 716 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 717 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 718 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 719 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 720 % 721 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 722 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 723 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 724 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 725 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 726 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 727 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 728 \penalty9999 729 % 730 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 731 \kern -#1\mil 732 % 733 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 734 \nobreak 735 \fi 736} 737 738% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 739 740\let\br = \par 741 742% @page forces the start of a new page. 743% 744\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 745 746% @exdent text.... 747% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 748 749% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 750% That's how much \exdent should take out. 751\newskip\exdentamount 752 753% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 754\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 755 756% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 757\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 758 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 759 760% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 761% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 762% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 763% 764\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 765\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 766% 767\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 768 \nobreak 769 \kern-\strutdepth 770 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 771 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 772 \vss 773 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 774 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 775 \ifx#1l% 776 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 777 \else 778 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 779 \fi 780 \null 781 }% 782}} 783\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 784\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 785% 786% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 787% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 788% else use TEXT for both). 789% 790\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 791\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 792 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 793 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 794 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 795 \def\righttext{#2}% 796 \else 797 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 798 \def\righttext{#1}% 799 \fi 800 % 801 \ifodd\pageno 802 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 803 \else 804 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 805 \fi 806 \temp 807} 808 809% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 810% 811\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 812\def\includezzz#1{% 813 \pushthisfilestack 814 \def\thisfile{#1}% 815 {% 816 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 817 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 818 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 819 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 820 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 821 % 822 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 823 % definitions, etc. 824 \expandafter 825 }\temp 826 \popthisfilestack 827} 828\def\filenamecatcodes{% 829 \catcode`\\=\other 830 \catcode`~=\other 831 \catcode`^=\other 832 \catcode`_=\other 833 \catcode`|=\other 834 \catcode`<=\other 835 \catcode`>=\other 836 \catcode`+=\other 837 \catcode`-=\other 838 \catcode`\`=\other 839 \catcode`\'=\other 840} 841 842\def\pushthisfilestack{% 843 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 844} 845\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 846 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 847} 848\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 849 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 850} 851 852\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 853\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 854 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 855% 856\def\thisfile{} 857 858% @center line 859% outputs that line, centered. 860% 861\parseargdef\center{% 862 \ifhmode 863 \let\centersub\centerH 864 \else 865 \let\centersub\centerV 866 \fi 867 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 868 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 869} 870\def\centerH#1{{% 871 \hfil\break 872 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 873 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 874 \line{#1}% 875 \break 876}} 877% 878\newcount\centerpenalty 879\def\centerV#1{% 880 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 881 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 882 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 883 % prevent a page break here. 884 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 885 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 886 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 887 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 888} 889 890% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 891% 892\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 893 894% @comment ...line which is ignored... 895% @c is the same as @comment 896% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 897 898 899\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 900\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 901\cxxx} 902{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 903% 904\let\comment\c 905 906% @paragraphindent NCHARS 907% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 908% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 909% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 910% 911\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 912\def\noneword{none} 913% 914\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 915 \def\temp{#1}% 916 \ifx\temp\asisword 917 \else 918 \ifx\temp\noneword 919 \defaultparindent = 0pt 920 \else 921 \defaultparindent = #1em 922 \fi 923 \fi 924 \parindent = \defaultparindent 925} 926 927% @exampleindent NCHARS 928% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 929% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 930% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 931\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 932 \def\temp{#1}% 933 \ifx\temp\asisword 934 \else 935 \ifx\temp\noneword 936 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 937 \else 938 \lispnarrowing = #1em 939 \fi 940 \fi 941} 942 943% @firstparagraphindent WORD 944% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 945% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 946% paragraphs. 947% 948% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 949% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 950% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 951% By default, we suppress indentation. 952% 953\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 954\def\insertword{insert} 955% 956\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 957 \def\temp{#1}% 958 \ifx\temp\noneword 959 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 960 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 961 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 962 \else 963 \errhelp = \EMsimple 964 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 965 \fi\fi 966} 967 968% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 969% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 970% 971% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 972% paragraph. 973% 974\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 975 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 976 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 977 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 978} 979% 980\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 981 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 982 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 983 \global\everypar = {}% 984} 985 986 987% @refill is a no-op. 988\let\refill=\relax 989 990% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 991\let\setfilename=\comment 992 993% @bye. 994\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 995 996 997\message{pdf,} 998% adobe `portable' document format 999\newcount\tempnum 1000\newcount\lnkcount 1001\newtoks\filename 1002\newcount\filenamelength 1003\newcount\pgn 1004\newtoks\toksA 1005\newtoks\toksB 1006\newtoks\toksC 1007\newtoks\toksD 1008\newbox\boxA 1009\newbox\boxB 1010\newcount\countA 1011\newif\ifpdf 1012\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1013 1014% 1015% For LuaTeX 1016% 1017 1018\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1019\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1020 1021\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1022\else 1023 % Use Unicode destination names 1024 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1025 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1026 \begingroup 1027 \catcode`\%=12 1028 \directlua{ 1029 function UTF16oct(str) 1030 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1031 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1032 if c < 0x10000 then 1033 tex.sprint( 1034 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1035 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1036 (c / 256), (c % 256))) 1037 else 1038 c = c - 0x10000 1039 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1040 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1041 tex.sprint( 1042 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1043 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1044 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1045 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1046 (c_hi / 256), (c_hi % 256), 1047 (c_lo / 256), (c_lo % 256))) 1048 end 1049 end 1050 end 1051 } 1052 \endgroup 1053 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1054 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1055 \begingroup 1056 \directlua{ 1057 function PDFescstr(str) 1058 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1059 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1060 tex.sprint( 1061 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1062 c)) 1063 else 1064 tex.sprint(string.char(c)) 1065 end 1066 end 1067 end 1068 } 1069 \endgroup 1070 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1071 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1072 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1073 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1074 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1075 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1076 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1077 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1078 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1079 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1080 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1081 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1082 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1083 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1084 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1085 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1086 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1087 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1088 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1089 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1090 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1091 \fi 1092\fi 1093 1094% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1095% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1096\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1097\else 1098 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1099 \else 1100 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1101 \else 1102 \pdftrue 1103 \fi 1104 \fi 1105\fi 1106 1107% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1108% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1109% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1110% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1111% 1112% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1113% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1114% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1115% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1116% do this reliably, so we use it. 1117 1118% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1119% which we \xdef. 1120\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1121 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1122 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1123 % Many times it won't matter. 1124 \xdef#1{#1}% 1125 \else 1126 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1127 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1128 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1129 \fi 1130} 1131\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1132 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1133 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1134 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1135 \else 1136 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1137 \fi 1138} 1139 1140\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1141with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1142be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1143output) for that.)} 1144 1145\ifpdf 1146 % 1147 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1148 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1149 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1150 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1151 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1152 % black by default, though. 1153 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1154 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1155 % 1156 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1157 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1158 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1159 % 1160 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1161 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1162 \def\setcolor#1{% 1163 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1164 \domark 1165 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1166 } 1167 % 1168 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1169 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1170 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1171 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1172 % 1173 \def\makefootline{% 1174 \baselineskip24pt 1175 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1176 } 1177 % 1178 \def\makeheadline{% 1179 \vbox to 0pt{% 1180 \vskip-22.5pt 1181 \line{% 1182 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1183 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1184 \getcolormarks 1185 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1186 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1187 }% 1188 \vss 1189 }% 1190 \nointerlineskip 1191 } 1192 % 1193 % 1194 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1195 % 1196 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1197 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1198 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1199 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1200 % 1201 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1202 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1203 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1204 % bitmap. 1205 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1206 \begingroup 1207 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1208 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1209 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1210 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1211 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1212 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1213 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1214 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1215 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1216 \fi 1217 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1218 \fi 1219 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1220 \fi 1221 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1222 \fi 1223 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1224 \fi 1225 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1226 \fi 1227 \closein 1 1228 \endgroup 1229 % 1230 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1231 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1232 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1233 \immediate\pdfimage 1234 \else 1235 \immediate\pdfximage 1236 \fi 1237 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1238 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1239 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1240 #1.\pdfimgext 1241 \else 1242 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1243 \fi 1244 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1245 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1246 \fi} 1247 % 1248 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1249 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1250 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1251 \indexnofonts 1252 \makevalueexpandable 1253 \turnoffactive 1254 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1255 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1256 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1257 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1258 \else 1259 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1260 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1261 \else 1262 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1263 \passthroughcharsfalse 1264 \fi 1265 \fi 1266 \else 1267 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1268 \passthroughcharsfalse 1269 \fi 1270 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1271 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1272 }} 1273 % 1274 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1275 \indexnofonts 1276 \makevalueexpandable 1277 \turnoffactive 1278 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1279 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1280 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1281 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1282 \passthroughcharstrue 1283 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1284 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1285 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1286 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1287 \else 1288 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1289 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1290 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1291 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1292 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1293 % Use ASCII approximations. 1294 \passthroughcharsfalse 1295 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1296 \else 1297 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1298 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1299 \passthroughcharstrue 1300 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1301 \fi 1302 \else 1303 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1304 % Use ASCII approximations. 1305 \passthroughcharsfalse 1306 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1307 \fi 1308 \fi 1309 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1310 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1311 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1312 }} 1313 % 1314 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1315 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1316 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1317 } 1318 % 1319 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1320 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1321 % 1322 % by default, use black for everything. 1323 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1324 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1325 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1326 % 1327 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1328 % come from Petr Olsak 1329 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1330 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1331 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1332 \advance\tempnum by 1 1333 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1334 % 1335 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1336 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1337 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1338 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1339 % #4 is the page number 1340 % 1341 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1342 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1343 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1344 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1345 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1346 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1347 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1348 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1349 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1350 \fi 1351 % 1352 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1353 } 1354 % 1355 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1356 \begingroup 1357 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1358 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1359 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1360 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1361 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1362 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1363 }% 1364 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1365 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1366 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1367 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1368 }% 1369 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1370 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1371 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1372 }% 1373 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1374 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1375 }% 1376 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1377 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1378 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1379 % 1380 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1381 % al. a second time, below. 1382 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1383 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1384 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1385 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1386 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1387 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1388 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1389 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1390 \readdatafile{toc}% 1391 % 1392 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1393 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1394 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1395 % 1396 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1397 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1398 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1399 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1400 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1401 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1402 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1403 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1404 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1405 % 1406 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1407 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1408 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1409 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1410 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1411 % 1412 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1413 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1414 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1415 % we use for the index sort strings. 1416 % 1417 \indexnofonts 1418 \setupdatafile 1419 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1420 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1421 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1422 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1423 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1424 \input \tocreadfilename 1425 \endgroup 1426 } 1427 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1428 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1429 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1430 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1431 ] 1432 % 1433 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1434 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1435 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1436 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1437 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1438 \fi 1439 \nextsp} 1440 \def\getfilename#1{% 1441 \filenamelength=0 1442 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1443 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1444 \edef\temp{#1}% 1445 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1446 } 1447 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1448 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1449 \else 1450 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1451 \fi 1452 % make a live url in pdf output. 1453 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1454 \begingroup 1455 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1456 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1457 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1458 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1459 % 1460 \normalturnoffactive 1461 \def\@{@}% 1462 \let\/=\empty 1463 \makevalueexpandable 1464 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1465 % special-casing \var here? 1466 \def\var##1{##1}% 1467 % 1468 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1469 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1470 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1471 \endgroup} 1472 % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may 1473 % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index 1474 % entry. 1475 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1476 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1477 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1478 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1479 \def\maketoks{% 1480 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1481 \ifx\first0\adn0 1482 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1483 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1484 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1485 \else 1486 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1487 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1488 \let\next=\maketoks 1489 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1490 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1491 \fi 1492 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1493 \next} 1494 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1495 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1496 \def\pdflink#1{% 1497 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1498 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1499 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1500\else 1501 % non-pdf mode 1502 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1503 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1504 \let\endlink = \relax 1505 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1506 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1507 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1508\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1509 1510% 1511% For XeTeX 1512% 1513\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1514\else 1515 % 1516 % XeTeX version check 1517 % 1518 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1519 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1520 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1521 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1522 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1523 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1524 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1525 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1526 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1527 \else 1528 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1529 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1530 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1531 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1532 % 1533 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1534 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1535 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1536 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1537 \fi 1538 % 1539 % Color support 1540 % 1541 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1542 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1543 % 1544 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1545 % 1546 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1547 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1548 \def\setcolor#1{% 1549 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1550 \domark 1551 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1552 } 1553 % 1554 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1555 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1556 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1557 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1558 % 1559 \def\makefootline{% 1560 \baselineskip24pt 1561 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1562 } 1563 % 1564 \def\makeheadline{% 1565 \vbox to 0pt{% 1566 \vskip-22.5pt 1567 \line{% 1568 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1569 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1570 \getcolormarks 1571 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1572 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1573 }% 1574 \vss 1575 }% 1576 \nointerlineskip 1577 } 1578 % 1579 % PDF outline support 1580 % 1581 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1582 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1583 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1584 } 1585 % 1586 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1587 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1588 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1589 \indexnofonts 1590 \makevalueexpandable 1591 \turnoffactive 1592 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1593 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1594 \else 1595 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1596 \passthroughcharsfalse 1597 \fi 1598 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1599 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1600 }} 1601 % 1602 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1603 \turnoffactive 1604 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1605 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1606 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1607 % So we do not convert. 1608 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1609 }} 1610 % 1611 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1612 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1613 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1614 } 1615 % 1616 % by default, use black for everything. 1617 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1618 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1619 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1620 % 1621 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1622 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1623 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1624 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1625 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1626 \fi 1627 % 1628 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1629 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1630 } 1631 % 1632 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1633 \begingroup 1634 % 1635 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1636 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1637 % 1638 % We use node names as destinations. 1639 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1640 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1641 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1642 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1643 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1644 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1645 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1646 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1647 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1648 % 1649 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1650 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1651 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1652 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1653 \let\unnchapentry\numchapentry% 1654 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1655 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1656 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1657 % 1658 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1659 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1660 % 1661 \indexnofonts 1662 \setupdatafile 1663 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1664 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1665 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1666 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1667 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1668 \input \tocreadfilename 1669 \endgroup 1670 } 1671 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1672 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1673 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1674 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1675 ] 1676 1677 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1678 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1679 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1680 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1681 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1682 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1683% 1684 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1685 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1686 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1687 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1688 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1689 \fi 1690 \nextsp} 1691 \def\getfilename#1{% 1692 \filenamelength=0 1693 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1694 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1695 \edef\temp{#1}% 1696 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1697 } 1698 % make a live url in pdf output. 1699 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1700 \begingroup 1701 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1702 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1703 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1704 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1705 % 1706 \normalturnoffactive 1707 \def\@{@}% 1708 \let\/=\empty 1709 \makevalueexpandable 1710 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1711 % special-casing \var here? 1712 \def\var##1{##1}% 1713 % 1714 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1715 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1716 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1717 \endgroup} 1718 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1719 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1720 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1721 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1722 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1723 \def\maketoks{% 1724 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1725 \ifx\first0\adn0 1726 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1727 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1728 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1729 \else 1730 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1731 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1732 \let\next=\maketoks 1733 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1734 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1735 \fi 1736 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1737 \next} 1738 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1739 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1740 \def\pdflink#1{% 1741 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1742 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1743 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1744 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1745% 1746 % 1747 % @image support 1748 % 1749 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1750 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1751 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1752 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1753 % 1754 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1755 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1756 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1757 % bitmap. 1758 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1759 \begingroup 1760 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1761 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1762 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1763 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1764 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1765 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1766 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1767 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1768 \fi 1769 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1770 \fi 1771 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1772 \fi 1773 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1774 \fi 1775 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1776 \fi 1777 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1778 \fi 1779 \closein 1 1780 \endgroup 1781 % 1782 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1783 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1784 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1785 \else 1786 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1787 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1788 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1789 \else 1790 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1791 \fi 1792 \fi 1793 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1794 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1795 } 1796\fi 1797 1798 1799% 1800\message{fonts,} 1801 1802% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1803% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1804% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1805% 1806\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1807\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1808\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1809% 1810% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1811\def\baselinefactor{1} 1812% 1813\newdimen\textleading 1814\def\setleading#1{% 1815 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1816 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1817 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1818 \normalbaselines 1819 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1820 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1821 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1822 }% 1823} 1824 1825% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1826% 1827% do nothing with this by default. 1828\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1829\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1830\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1831 1832% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1833% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1834% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1835\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1836 \begingroup 1837 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1838 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1839%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1840%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1841%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1842%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1843%%Version: 1.000 1844%%EndComments 1845/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 184612 dict begin 1847begincmap 1848/CIDSystemInfo 1849<< /Registry (TeX) 1850/Ordering (OT1) 1851/Supplement 0 1852>> def 1853/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1854/CMapType 2 def 18551 begincodespacerange 1856<00> <7F> 1857endcodespacerange 18588 beginbfrange 1859<00> <01> <0393> 1860<09> <0A> <03A8> 1861<23> <26> <0023> 1862<28> <3B> <0028> 1863<3F> <5B> <003F> 1864<5D> <5E> <005D> 1865<61> <7A> <0061> 1866<7B> <7C> <2013> 1867endbfrange 186840 beginbfchar 1869<02> <0398> 1870<03> <039B> 1871<04> <039E> 1872<05> <03A0> 1873<06> <03A3> 1874<07> <03D2> 1875<08> <03A6> 1876<0B> <00660066> 1877<0C> <00660069> 1878<0D> <0066006C> 1879<0E> <006600660069> 1880<0F> <00660066006C> 1881<10> <0131> 1882<11> <0237> 1883<12> <0060> 1884<13> <00B4> 1885<14> <02C7> 1886<15> <02D8> 1887<16> <00AF> 1888<17> <02DA> 1889<18> <00B8> 1890<19> <00DF> 1891<1A> <00E6> 1892<1B> <0153> 1893<1C> <00F8> 1894<1D> <00C6> 1895<1E> <0152> 1896<1F> <00D8> 1897<21> <0021> 1898<22> <201D> 1899<27> <2019> 1900<3C> <00A1> 1901<3D> <003D> 1902<3E> <00BF> 1903<5C> <201C> 1904<5F> <02D9> 1905<60> <2018> 1906<7D> <02DD> 1907<7E> <007E> 1908<7F> <00A8> 1909endbfchar 1910endcmap 1911CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1912end 1913end 1914%%EndResource 1915%%EOF 1916 }\endgroup 1917 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1918 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1919 }% 1920% 1921% \cmapOT1IT 1922 \begingroup 1923 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1924 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1925%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1926%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1927%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1928%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1929%%Version: 1.000 1930%%EndComments 1931/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 193212 dict begin 1933begincmap 1934/CIDSystemInfo 1935<< /Registry (TeX) 1936/Ordering (OT1IT) 1937/Supplement 0 1938>> def 1939/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1940/CMapType 2 def 19411 begincodespacerange 1942<00> <7F> 1943endcodespacerange 19448 beginbfrange 1945<00> <01> <0393> 1946<09> <0A> <03A8> 1947<25> <26> <0025> 1948<28> <3B> <0028> 1949<3F> <5B> <003F> 1950<5D> <5E> <005D> 1951<61> <7A> <0061> 1952<7B> <7C> <2013> 1953endbfrange 195442 beginbfchar 1955<02> <0398> 1956<03> <039B> 1957<04> <039E> 1958<05> <03A0> 1959<06> <03A3> 1960<07> <03D2> 1961<08> <03A6> 1962<0B> <00660066> 1963<0C> <00660069> 1964<0D> <0066006C> 1965<0E> <006600660069> 1966<0F> <00660066006C> 1967<10> <0131> 1968<11> <0237> 1969<12> <0060> 1970<13> <00B4> 1971<14> <02C7> 1972<15> <02D8> 1973<16> <00AF> 1974<17> <02DA> 1975<18> <00B8> 1976<19> <00DF> 1977<1A> <00E6> 1978<1B> <0153> 1979<1C> <00F8> 1980<1D> <00C6> 1981<1E> <0152> 1982<1F> <00D8> 1983<21> <0021> 1984<22> <201D> 1985<23> <0023> 1986<24> <00A3> 1987<27> <2019> 1988<3C> <00A1> 1989<3D> <003D> 1990<3E> <00BF> 1991<5C> <201C> 1992<5F> <02D9> 1993<60> <2018> 1994<7D> <02DD> 1995<7E> <007E> 1996<7F> <00A8> 1997endbfchar 1998endcmap 1999CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2000end 2001end 2002%%EndResource 2003%%EOF 2004 }\endgroup 2005 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2006 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2007 }% 2008% 2009% \cmapOT1TT 2010 \begingroup 2011 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2012 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2013%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2014%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2015%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2016%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2017%%Version: 1.000 2018%%EndComments 2019/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 202012 dict begin 2021begincmap 2022/CIDSystemInfo 2023<< /Registry (TeX) 2024/Ordering (OT1TT) 2025/Supplement 0 2026>> def 2027/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2028/CMapType 2 def 20291 begincodespacerange 2030<00> <7F> 2031endcodespacerange 20325 beginbfrange 2033<00> <01> <0393> 2034<09> <0A> <03A8> 2035<21> <26> <0021> 2036<28> <5F> <0028> 2037<61> <7E> <0061> 2038endbfrange 203932 beginbfchar 2040<02> <0398> 2041<03> <039B> 2042<04> <039E> 2043<05> <03A0> 2044<06> <03A3> 2045<07> <03D2> 2046<08> <03A6> 2047<0B> <2191> 2048<0C> <2193> 2049<0D> <0027> 2050<0E> <00A1> 2051<0F> <00BF> 2052<10> <0131> 2053<11> <0237> 2054<12> <0060> 2055<13> <00B4> 2056<14> <02C7> 2057<15> <02D8> 2058<16> <00AF> 2059<17> <02DA> 2060<18> <00B8> 2061<19> <00DF> 2062<1A> <00E6> 2063<1B> <0153> 2064<1C> <00F8> 2065<1D> <00C6> 2066<1E> <0152> 2067<1F> <00D8> 2068<20> <2423> 2069<27> <2019> 2070<60> <2018> 2071<7F> <00A8> 2072endbfchar 2073endcmap 2074CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2075end 2076end 2077%%EndResource 2078%%EOF 2079 }\endgroup 2080 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2081 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2082 }% 2083\fi\fi 2084 2085 2086% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2087% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2088% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2089% Example: 2090% #1 = \textrm 2091% #2 = \rmshape 2092% #3 = 10 2093% #4 = \mainmagstep 2094% #5 = OT1 2095% 2096\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2097 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2098 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2099} 2100% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2101\let\cmap\gobble 2102% 2103% (end of cmaps) 2104 2105% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2106% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2107% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2108\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2109\def\fontprefix{cm} 2110\fi 2111% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2112\def\rmshape{r} 2113\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2114\def\bfshape{b} 2115\def\bxshape{bx} 2116\def\ttshape{tt} 2117\def\ttbshape{tt} 2118\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2119\def\itshape{ti} 2120\def\itbshape{bxti} 2121\def\slshape{sl} 2122\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2123\def\sfshape{ss} 2124\def\sfbshape{ss} 2125\def\scshape{csc} 2126\def\scbshape{csc} 2127 2128% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2129% 2130\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2131% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2132\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2133\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2134\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2135\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2136\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2137\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2138\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2139\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2140\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2141\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2142\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2143\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2144\def\textecsize{1095} 2145 2146% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2147\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2148\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2149\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2150\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2151\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2152\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2153 2154% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2155\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2156\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2157\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2158\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2159\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2160\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2161\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2162\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2163\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2164\font\smalli=cmmi9 2165\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2166\def\smallecsize{0900} 2167 2168% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2169\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2170\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2171\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2172\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2173\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2174\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2175\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2176\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2177\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2178\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2179\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2180\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2181 2182% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2183\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2184\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2185\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2186\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2187\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2188\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2189\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2190\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2191\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2192\font\seveni=cmmi7 2193\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2194\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2195 2196% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2197\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2198\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2199\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2200\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2201\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2202\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2203\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2204\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2205\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2206\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2207\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2208\def\titleecsize{2074} 2209 2210% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2211\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2212\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2213\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2214\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2215\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2216\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2217\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2218\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2219\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2220\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2221\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2222\def\chapecsize{1728} 2223 2224% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2225\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2226\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2227\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2228\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2229\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2230\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2231\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2232\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2233\let\secbf\secrm 2234\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2235\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2236\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2237\def\sececsize{1440} 2238 2239% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2240\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2241\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2242\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2243\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2244\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2245\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2246\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2247\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2248\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2249\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2250\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2251\def\ssececsize{1200} 2252 2253% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2254\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2255\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2256\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2257\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2258\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2259\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2260\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2261\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2262\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2263\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2264\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2265\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2266 2267\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2268\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2269\rm 2270} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2271 2272 2273% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2274% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2275% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2276% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2277% 2278\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2279% Text fonts (10pt). 2280\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2281\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2282\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2283\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2284\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2285\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2286\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2287\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2288\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2289\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2290\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2291\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2292\def\textecsize{1000} 2293 2294% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2295\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2296\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2297\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2298\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2299\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2300\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2301 2302% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2303\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2304\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2305\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2306\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2307\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2308\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2309\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2310\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2311\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2312\font\smalli=cmmi9 2313\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2314\def\smallecsize{0900} 2315 2316% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2317\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2318\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2319\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2320\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2321\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2322\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2323\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2324\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2325\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2326\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2327\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2328\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2329 2330% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2331\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2332\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2333\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2334\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2335\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2336\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2337\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2338\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2339\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2340\font\seveni=cmmi7 2341\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2342\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2343 2344% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2345\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2346\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2347\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2348\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2349\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2350\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2351\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2352\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2353\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2354\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2355\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2356\def\titleecsize{2074} 2357 2358% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2359\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2360\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2361\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2362\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2363\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2364\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2365\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2366\let\chapbf\chaprm 2367\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2368\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2369\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2370\def\chapecsize{1440} 2371 2372% Section fonts (12pt). 2373\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2374\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2375\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2376\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2377\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2378\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2379\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2380\let\secbf\secrm 2381\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2382\font\seci=cmmi12 2383\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2384\def\sececsize{1200} 2385 2386% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2387\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2388\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2389\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2390\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2391\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2392\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2393\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2394\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2395\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2396\font\sseci=cmmi10 2397\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2398\def\ssececsize{1000} 2399 2400% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2401\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2402\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2403\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2404\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2405\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2406\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2407\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2408\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2409\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2410\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2411\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2412\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2413 2414\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2415\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2416\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2417\rm 2418} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2419 2420% Fonts for short table of contents. 2421\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2422\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2423\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2424\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2425 2426 2427% We provide the user-level command 2428% @fonttextsize 10 2429% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2430% 2431\def\xiword{11} 2432\def\xword{10} 2433\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2434% 2435\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2436 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2437 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2438 % 2439 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2440 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2441 % 2442 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2443 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2444 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2445 \else 2446 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2447 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2448 \fi\fi 2449 \endgroup 2450} 2451 2452% 2453% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2454% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2455% italics, not bold italics. 2456% 2457\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2458 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2459 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2460} 2461 2462\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2463\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2464\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2465\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2466\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 2467 2468% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2469% So we set up a \sf. 2470\newfam\sffam 2471\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2472 2473% We don't need math for this font style. 2474\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2475 2476 2477% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2478% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. 2479% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2480% 2481\def\resetmathfonts{% 2482 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2483 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2484 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2485 % 2486 % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless 2487 % of the current font size. 2488 \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy 2489 \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl 2490 \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt 2491 \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf 2492} 2493 2494% 2495 2496% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2497% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2498% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2499% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2500% 2501% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics 2502% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only. 2503% 2504% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2505% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2506% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2507% 2508% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2509% 2510 2511\def\assignfonts#1{% 2512 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2513 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2514 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2515 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2516 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2517 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2518 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2519 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2520 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2521 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2522} 2523 2524\newif\ifrmisbold 2525 2526% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2527% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2528% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2529\def\switchtolllsize{% 2530 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2531 \ifrmisbold 2532 \let\rmfont\bffont 2533 \fi 2534 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2535}% 2536 2537\def\switchtolsize{% 2538 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2539 \ifrmisbold 2540 \let\rmfont\bffont 2541 \fi 2542 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2543}% 2544 2545\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2546\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2547 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2548 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2549 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2550 \assignfonts{#1}% 2551 \resetmathfonts 2552 \setleading{#4}% 2553}} 2554 2555\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2556\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2557\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2558\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2559\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2560\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2561\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2562\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2563 2564\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2565\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2566\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2567 2568% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2569\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2570\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2571 2572% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2573\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2574 2575% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2576% can fit this many characters: 2577% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2578% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2579% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2580% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2581% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2582% 2583% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2584% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2585% --karl, 24jan03. 2586 2587% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2588% 2589\definetextfontsizexi 2590 2591 2592\message{markup,} 2593 2594% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2595% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2596% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2597% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2598% 2599\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2600 2601% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2602% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2603% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2604% style. 2605 2606\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2607 2608\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2609 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2610 \markupstylesetup 2611} 2612 2613\let\markupstylesetup\empty 2614 2615\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2616 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2617 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2618 \def#1% 2619} 2620 2621% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2622\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2623 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2624 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2625 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2626} 2627 2628\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2629 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2630 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2631 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2632} 2633 2634{ 2635\catcode`\'=\active 2636\catcode`\`=\active 2637 2638\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2639\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2640 2641\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2642\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2643} 2644 2645\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2646\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2647% 2648\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2649\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2650% 2651\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2652\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2653% 2654\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2655\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2656% 2657\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2658\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2659% 2660\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2661\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2662 2663% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2664% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2665% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2666% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2667% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2668% 2669\def\codequoteright{% 2670 \ifmonospace 2671 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2672 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2673 '% 2674 \else \char'15 \fi 2675 \else \char'15 \fi 2676 \else 2677 '% 2678 \fi 2679} 2680% 2681% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2682% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2683% the code environments to do likewise. 2684% 2685\def\codequoteleft{% 2686 \ifmonospace 2687 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2688 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2689 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2690 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2691 \relax`% 2692 \else \char'22 \fi 2693 \else \char'22 \fi 2694 \else 2695 \relax`% 2696 \fi 2697} 2698 2699% Commands to set the quote options. 2700% 2701\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2702 \def\temp{#1}% 2703 \ifx\temp\onword 2704 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2705 = t% 2706 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2707 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2708 = \relax 2709 \else 2710 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2711 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2712 \fi\fi 2713} 2714% 2715\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2716 \def\temp{#1}% 2717 \ifx\temp\onword 2718 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2719 = t% 2720 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2721 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2722 = \relax 2723 \else 2724 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2725 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2726 \fi\fi 2727} 2728 2729% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2730\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2731 2732% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2733\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2734 2735% Font commands. 2736 2737% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2738% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2739% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2740\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2741 \ifusingtt 2742 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2743 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2744 \next 2745} 2746\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2747\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2748 2749% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2750% character) is such as not to need one. 2751\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2752 \ifx\next,% 2753 \else\ifx\next-% 2754 \else\ifx\next.% 2755 \else\ifx\next\.% 2756 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2757 \else\ptexslash 2758 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2759 \aftersmartic 2760} 2761 2762% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2763\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2764 2765% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2766% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2767\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2768 2769\def\aftersmartic{} 2770\def\var#1{% 2771 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2772 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2773 \smartslanted{#1}% 2774} 2775 2776\let\i=\smartitalic 2777\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2778\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2779\let\emph=\smartitalic 2780 2781% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2782\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2783\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2784\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2785 2786% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2787\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2788\let\strong=\b 2789 2790% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2791\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2792 2793% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2794% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2795% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2796% 2797\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2798\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2799 2800% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2801% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2802% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2803% 2804\catcode`@=11 2805 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2806 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2807 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2808 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2809 } 2810 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2811 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2812 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2813 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2814 } 2815\catcode`@=\other 2816\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2817 2818% @t, explicit typewriter. 2819\def\t#1{% 2820 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2821 \null 2822} 2823 2824% @samp. 2825\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2826 2827% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2828\let\indicateurl=\samp 2829 2830% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2831% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2832% This is a subroutine for that. 2833\def\tclose#1{% 2834 {% 2835 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2836 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2837 % 2838 % Switch to typewriter. 2839 \tt 2840 % 2841 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2842 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2843 % 2844 % Turn off hyphenation. 2845 \nohyphenation 2846 % 2847 \rawbackslash 2848 \plainfrenchspacing 2849 #1% 2850 }% 2851 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2852} 2853 2854% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2855% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2856% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2857% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2858% 2859% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2860% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2861% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2862% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2863{ 2864 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2865 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2866 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2867 % 2868 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2869 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2870 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2871 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2872 \ifallowcodebreaks 2873 \let-\codedash 2874 \let_\codeunder 2875 \else 2876 \let-\normaldash 2877 \let_\realunder 2878 \fi 2879 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2880 % after the hyphen. 2881 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2882 % 2883 \codex 2884 } 2885 % 2886 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2887 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2888 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2889 % 2890 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2891 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2892 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2893 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2894 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2895 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2896 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2897 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2898 \fi 2899 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2900 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2901 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2902 } 2903} 2904\def\normaldash{-} 2905% 2906\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2907 2908\def\codeunder{% 2909 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2910 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2911 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2912 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2913 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2914 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2915 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2916 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2917 {\_}% 2918} 2919 2920% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2921% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2922% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2923% and _ on and off. 2924% 2925\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2926 2927\def\keywordtrue{true} 2928\def\keywordfalse{false} 2929 2930\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2931 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2932 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2933 \allowcodebreakstrue 2934 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2935 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2936 \else 2937 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2938 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2939 \fi\fi 2940} 2941 2942% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2943% so use \code rather than \samp. 2944\let\command=\code 2945\let\env=\code 2946\let\file=\code 2947\let\option=\code 2948 2949% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 2950% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 2951% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 2952% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2953 2954% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 2955% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 2956\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 2957 2958% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 2959% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which 2960% didn't support automatic breaking.) 2961\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 2962\let\uref=\urefbreak 2963% 2964\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 2965\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 2966 \unsepspaces 2967 \pdfurl{#1}% 2968 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2969 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2970 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2971 \else 2972 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 2973 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2974 \ifpdf 2975 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 2976 \ifurefurlonlylink 2977 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 2978 \unhbox0 2979 \else 2980 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 2981 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 2982 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 2983 \fi 2984 \else 2985 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 2986 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 2987 \else 2988 % For XeTeX 2989 \ifurefurlonlylink 2990 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 2991 \unhbox0 2992 \else 2993 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 2994 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 2995 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 2996 \fi 2997 \fi 2998 \fi 2999 \else 3000 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3001 \fi 3002 \fi 3003 \endlink 3004\endgroup} 3005 3006% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3007\def\urefcatcodes{% 3008 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3009 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3010 \catcode`\/=\active 3011} 3012{ 3013 \urefcatcodes 3014 % 3015 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3016 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 3017 \urefcatcodes 3018 \let&\urefcodeamp 3019 \let.\urefcodedot 3020 \let#\urefcodehash 3021 \let?\urefcodequest 3022 \let/\urefcodeslash 3023 \codex 3024 } 3025 % 3026 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3027 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3028 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3029 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3030 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3031 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3032} 3033 3034% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help 3035% line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in 3036% cmtt at least, especially for dots. 3037\def\urefprestretchamount{.13em} 3038\def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em} 3039\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 3040\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 3041% 3042\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch} 3043\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch} 3044\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch} 3045\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch} 3046\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3047{ 3048 \catcode`\/=\active 3049 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3050 \urefprestretch \slashChar 3051 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3052 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3053 \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi 3054 } 3055} 3056 3057% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special 3058% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so 3059% allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control. 3060% 3061\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3062 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3063 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3064 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3065 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3066 \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3067 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3068 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak} 3069 \else 3070 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3071 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3072 \fi\fi\fi 3073} 3074\def\wordafter{after} 3075\def\wordbefore{before} 3076\def\wordnone{none} 3077 3078\urefbreakstyle after 3079 3080% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3081% 3082\let\url=\uref 3083 3084% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3085% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3086% 3087%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3088\ifpdf 3089 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3090 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3091 \unsepspaces 3092 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3093 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3094 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3095 \endlink 3096 \endgroup} 3097\else 3098 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3099 \let\email=\uref 3100 \else 3101 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3102 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3103 \unsepspaces 3104 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3105 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3106 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3107 \endlink 3108 \endgroup} 3109 \fi 3110\fi 3111 3112% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3113% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3114% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3115\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3116 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3117 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3118 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3119 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3120 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3121 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3122 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3123 \else 3124 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3125 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3126 \fi\fi\fi 3127} 3128\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3129\def\wordexample{example} 3130\def\wordcode{code} 3131 3132% Default is `distinct'. 3133\kbdinputstyle distinct 3134 3135% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3136% then @kbd has no effect. 3137\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3138 3139\def\xkey{\key} 3140\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3141 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3142 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3143 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3144 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3145} 3146 3147% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3148%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3149%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3150%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3151% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3152% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3153% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3154% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3155% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3156 3157% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 3158% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 3159% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 3160% 3161\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 3162 \nohyphenation 3163 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 3164 #1}\null} 3165 3166% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3167\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3168 3169% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3170\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3171\def\click{\arrow} 3172 3173% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3174% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3175% 3176\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3177 3178% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3179% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3180% all-uppercase. 3181% 3182\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3183\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3184 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3185 \def\temp{#2}% 3186 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3187 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3188 \fi 3189 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3190} 3191 3192% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3193% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3194% 3195\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3196\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3197 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3198 \def\temp{#2}% 3199 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3200 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3201 \fi 3202 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3203} 3204 3205% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3206% 3207\def\asis#1{#1} 3208 3209% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3210% 3211% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3212% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3213% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3214% which is what @var uses. 3215{ 3216 \catcode`\_ = \active 3217 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3218 \catcode`\_=\active 3219 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3220 } 3221} 3222% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3223% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3224% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3225% 3226% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3227\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3228% 3229\def\math{% 3230 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3231 \tex 3232 \mathunderscore 3233 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3234 \mathactive 3235 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3236 \let\"=\ddot 3237 \let\'=\acute 3238 \let\==\bar 3239 \let\^=\hat 3240 \let\`=\grave 3241 \let\u=\breve 3242 \let\v=\check 3243 \let\~=\tilde 3244 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3245 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3246 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3247 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3248} 3249\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3250 3251% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3252% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3253% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3254% 3255{ 3256 \catcode`^ = \active 3257 \catcode`< = \active 3258 \catcode`> = \active 3259 \catcode`+ = \active 3260 \catcode`' = \active 3261 \gdef\mathactive{% 3262 \let^ = \ptexhat 3263 \let< = \ptexless 3264 \let> = \ptexgtr 3265 \let+ = \ptexplus 3266 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3267 } 3268} 3269 3270% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3271% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3272% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3273% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3274% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3275% 3276\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3277\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3278% 3279\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3280\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3281 3282% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3283% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3284% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3285% 3286\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3287% 3288\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3289\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3290 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3291 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3292} 3293% 3294% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3295% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3296\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3297\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3298 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3299 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3300} 3301% 3302% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3303% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3304% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3305% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3306% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3307% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3308% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3309% 3310\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3311\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3312\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3313 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3314 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3315 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3316} 3317 3318% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3319% 3320\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3321\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3322 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3323 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3324 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3325} 3326 3327% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3328% 3329\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3330\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3331 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3332 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3333} 3334 3335 3336\message{glyphs,} 3337% and logos. 3338 3339% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3340\def\@{\char64 } 3341\let\atchar=\@ 3342 3343% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3344\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3345\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3346\let\{=\lbracechar 3347\let\}=\rbracechar 3348 3349% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3350\let\comma = , 3351 3352% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3353% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3354\let\, = \ptexc 3355\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3356\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3357\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3358\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3359\let\udotaccent = \d 3360 3361% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3362% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3363\def\questiondown{?`} 3364\def\exclamdown{!`} 3365\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3366\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3367 3368% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3369\def\imacro{i} 3370\def\jmacro{j} 3371\def\dotless#1{% 3372 \def\temp{#1}% 3373 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3374 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3375 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3376 \fi\fi 3377} 3378 3379% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3380% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3381% 3382\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3383 3384% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3385% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3386% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3387% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3388% \scriptscriptstyle). 3389% 3390\def\LaTeX{% 3391 L\kern-.36em 3392 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3393 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3394 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3395 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3396 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3397 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3398 \else 3399 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3400 \switchtolllsize A% 3401 \fi 3402 }% 3403 \vss 3404 }}% 3405 \kern-.15em 3406 \TeX 3407} 3408 3409% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3410% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3411% but safer, and can't hurt. 3412\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3413\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3414% 3415\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3416\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3417\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3418\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3419 3420% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3421% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3422% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3423% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3424% whichever is larger. 3425% 3426\def\dots{% 3427 \leavevmode 3428 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3429 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3430 \dimen0 = \wd0 3431 \else 3432 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3433 \fi 3434 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3435 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3436 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3437 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3438 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3439 }% 3440} 3441 3442% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3443% 3444\def\enddots{% 3445 \dots 3446 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3447} 3448 3449% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3450% 3451% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3452% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3453% 3454\def\point{$\star$} 3455\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3456\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3457\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3458\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3459\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3460 3461% The @error{} command. 3462% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3463% 3464\newbox\errorbox 3465% 3466{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3467\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3468% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3469\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3470% 3471\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3472 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3473 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3474 \vbox{% 3475 \hrule height\dimen2 3476 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3477 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3478 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3479 \hrule height\dimen2} 3480 \hfil} 3481% 3482\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3483 3484% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3485% 3486\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 3487 3488% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3489% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3490% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3491% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3492% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3493% 3494% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3495% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3496% font height. 3497% 3498% feymr - regular 3499% feymo - slanted 3500% feybr - bold 3501% feybo - bold slanted 3502% 3503% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3504% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3505% Hmm. 3506% 3507% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3508% Hope not. 3509% 3510% 3511\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3512\def\eurofont{% 3513 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3514 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3515 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3516 % font installed. 3517 % 3518 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3519 % that to the current nominal size. 3520 % 3521 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3522 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3523 % 3524 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3525 % 3526 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3527 % bold: 3528 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3529 \else 3530 % regular: 3531 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3532 \fi 3533 \thiseurofont 3534} 3535 3536% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3537% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3538% the redefinition. 3539% 3540% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3541\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3542\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3543\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3544\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3545% 3546\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3547\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3548\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3549\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3550\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3551\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3552\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3553\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3554% 3555% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3556% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3557% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3558% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3559% 3560% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3561% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3562% the same EC font. 3563\def\ogonek#1{{% 3564 \def\temp{#1}% 3565 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3566 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3567 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3568 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3569 \else 3570 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3571 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3572 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3573 \fi 3574 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3575 }% 3576} 3577\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3578\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3579\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3580\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3581% 3582% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3583% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3584% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3585% package and follow the same conventions. 3586% 3587\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3588\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3589% 3590\def\etcfont#1{% 3591 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3592 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3593 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3594 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3595 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3596 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3597 \ifmonospace 3598 % typewriter: 3599 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3600 \else 3601 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3602 % bold: 3603 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3604 \else 3605 % regular: 3606 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3607 \fi 3608 \fi 3609 \thisecfont 3610} 3611 3612% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3613% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3614% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3615% 3616\def\registeredsymbol{% 3617 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3618 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3619 }$% 3620} 3621 3622% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3623% 3624\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3625 3626% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3627% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3628% so we'll define it if necessary. 3629% 3630\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3631\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3632\fi 3633 3634% Quotes. 3635\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3636\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3637\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3638\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3639 3640 3641\message{page headings,} 3642 3643\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3644\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3645 3646% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3647\newif\ifseenauthor 3648\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3649 3650% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3651% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3652\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3653 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3654 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3655 after the title page.}}% 3656\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3657 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3658 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3659 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3660 3661\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3662 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3663 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3664 3665\envdef\titlepage{% 3666 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3667 \begingroup 3668 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3669 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3670 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3671 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3672 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3673 % 3674 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3675 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3676 \let\oldpage = \page 3677 \def\page{% 3678 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3679 \finishtitlepage 3680 \fi 3681 \let\page = \oldpage 3682 \page 3683 \null 3684 }% 3685} 3686 3687\def\Etitlepage{% 3688 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3689 \finishtitlepage 3690 \fi 3691 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3692 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3693 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3694 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3695 \oldpage 3696 \endgroup 3697 % 3698 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3699 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3700 \HEADINGSon 3701} 3702 3703\def\finishtitlepage{% 3704 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3705 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3706 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3707} 3708 3709% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3710% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3711% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3712% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3713% 3714\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3715 \rm 3716 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3717 \parindent=0pt 3718 \tolerance=5000 3719 \ptexraggedright 3720} 3721 3722% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3723 3724\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3725\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3726 3727\parseargdef\title{% 3728 \checkenv\titlepage 3729 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3730 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3731 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3732 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3733} 3734 3735\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3736 \checkenv\titlepage 3737 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3738} 3739 3740% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3741% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3742% 3743\parseargdef\author{% 3744 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3745 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3746 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3747 \else 3748 \checkenv\titlepage 3749 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3750 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3751 \fi 3752} 3753 3754 3755% Set up page headings and footings. 3756 3757\let\thispage=\folio 3758 3759\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3760\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3761\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3762\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3763 3764% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3765\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3766 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3767\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3768 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3769\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3770 3771% Commands to set those variables. 3772% For example, this is what @headings on does 3773% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3774% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3775% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3776% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3777 3778 3779\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3780\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3781\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3782\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3783 3784\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3785\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3786\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3787\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3788 3789\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3790 3791\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3792\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3793\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3794\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3795 3796\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3797\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3798\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3799 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3800 % 3801 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3802 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3803 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3804 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3805} 3806 3807\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3808 3809% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3810% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3811% 3812% The same set of arguments for: 3813% 3814% @oddheadingmarks 3815% @evenfootingmarks 3816% @oddfootingmarks 3817% @everyheadingmarks 3818% @everyfootingmarks 3819 3820% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3821% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3822% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3823% 3824\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3825\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3826\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3827\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3828\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3829 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3830\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3831 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3832% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3833\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3834 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3835 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3836} 3837 3838\everyheadingmarks bottom 3839\everyfootingmarks bottom 3840 3841% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3842% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3843% @headings off turns them off. 3844% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3845% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3846% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3847% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3848% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3849% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3850 3851\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3852 3853\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3854 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 3855 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 3856} 3857 3858\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3859\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3860 3861% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3862% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3863% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3864% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3865% edge of all pages. 3866\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3867\global\pageno=1 3868\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3869\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3870\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3871\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3872\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3873} 3874\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3875 3876% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3877% page number on top right. 3878\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3879\global\pageno=1 3880\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3881\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3882\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3883\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3884\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3885} 3886\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3887 3888\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3889\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3890\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3891\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3892\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3893\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3894\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3895\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3896} 3897 3898\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3899\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3900\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3901\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3902\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3903\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3904\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3905} 3906 3907% Subroutines used in generating headings 3908% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3909% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3910% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3911\ifx\today\thisisundefined 3912\def\today{% 3913 \number\day\space 3914 \ifcase\month 3915 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3916 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3917 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3918 \fi 3919 \space\number\year} 3920\fi 3921 3922% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3923% It generates no output of its own. 3924\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3925\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3926 3927 3928\message{tables,} 3929% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3930 3931% default indentation of table text 3932\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3933% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3934\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3935% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3936\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3937 3938% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3939\newdimen\itemmax 3940 3941% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3942% these defs. 3943% They also define \itemindex 3944% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3945 3946\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3947 3948\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3949 3950\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3951\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3952 3953\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3954 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3955 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3956 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3957 \itemindex{#1}% 3958 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3959 % 3960 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3961 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3962 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3963 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3964 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3965 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3966 % 3967 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3968 % but leave it ragged-right. 3969 \begingroup 3970 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3971 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3972 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 3973 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3974 \endgroup 3975 % 3976 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3977 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3978 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3979 % 3980 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3981 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3982 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 3983 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 3984 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 3985 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 3986 % 3987 \penalty 10001 3988 \endgroup 3989 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 3990 \else 3991 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 3992 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 3993 \noindent 3994 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 3995 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 3996 % eventually be printed. 3997 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 3998 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 3999 \unhbox0 4000 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4001 \endgroup 4002 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4003 \fi 4004} 4005 4006\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4007\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4008 4009% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4010\envdef\table{% 4011 \let\itemindex\gobble 4012 \tablecheck{table}% 4013} 4014\envdef\ftable{% 4015 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4016 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4017} 4018\envdef\vtable{% 4019 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4020 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4021} 4022\def\tablecheck#1{% 4023 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4024 \endgroup 4025 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4026 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4027 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4028 \else 4029 \let\next\tablex 4030 \fi 4031 \next 4032} 4033\def\tablex#1{% 4034 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4035 \parsearg\tabley 4036} 4037\def\tabley#1{% 4038 {% 4039 \makevalueexpandable 4040 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4041 \expandafter 4042 }\temp \endtablez 4043} 4044\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4045 \aboveenvbreak 4046 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4047 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4048 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4049 \itemmax=\tableindent 4050 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4051 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4052 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4053 \parindent = 0pt 4054 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4055 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4056 \let\item = \internalBitem 4057 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4058} 4059\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4060\let\Eftable\Etable 4061\let\Evtable\Etable 4062\let\Eitemize\Etable 4063\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4064 4065% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4066 4067\newcount \itemno 4068 4069\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4070 4071\def\doitemize#1{% 4072 \aboveenvbreak 4073 \itemmax=\itemindent 4074 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4075 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4076 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4077 \parindent=0pt 4078 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4079 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4080 % 4081 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4082 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4083 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4084 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4085 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4086 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4087 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4088 % 4089 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4090 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4091 % 4092 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4093} 4094 4095% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4096% 4097\def\itemizeitem{% 4098 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4099 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4100 {% 4101 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4102 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4103 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4104 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4105 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4106 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4107 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4108 % that's the theory. 4109 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4110 \noindent 4111 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4112 % 4113 \ifinner\else 4114 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4115 \fi 4116 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4117 % @itemize looks awful there. 4118 }% 4119 \flushcr 4120} 4121 4122% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4123% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4124% 4125\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4126 4127% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4128% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4129% argument is the same as `1'. 4130% 4131\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4132\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4133 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4134 \def\thearg{#1}% 4135 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4136 % 4137 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4138 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4139 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4140 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4141 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4142 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4143 \ifx\rest\empty 4144 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4145 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4146 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4147 % not equal to itself. 4148 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4149 % 4150 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4151 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4152 % 4153 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4154 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4155 \else 4156 % It's a letter. 4157 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4158 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4159 \else 4160 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4161 \fi 4162 \fi 4163 \else 4164 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4165 \numericenumerate 4166 \fi 4167} 4168 4169% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4170% given in \thearg. 4171% 4172\def\numericenumerate{% 4173 \itemno = \thearg 4174 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4175} 4176 4177% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4178\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4179 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4180 \startenumeration{% 4181 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4182 \ifnum\itemno=0 4183 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4184 alphabet}% 4185 \fi 4186 \char\lccode\itemno 4187 }% 4188} 4189 4190% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4191\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4192 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4193 \startenumeration{% 4194 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4195 \ifnum\itemno=0 4196 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4197 alphabet} 4198 \fi 4199 \char\uccode\itemno 4200 }% 4201} 4202 4203% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4204% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4205% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4206% 4207\def\startenumeration#1{% 4208 \advance\itemno by -1 4209 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4210} 4211 4212% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 4213% to @enumerate. 4214% 4215\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 4216\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 4217\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4218\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4219 4220 4221% @multitable macros 4222% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 4223% 4224% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 4225% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 4226% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 4227% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 4228 4229% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 4230 4231% To make preamble: 4232% 4233% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 4234% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 4235% @item ... 4236% 4237% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 4238% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 4239% columns as desired. 4240 4241 4242% Or use a template: 4243% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4244% @item ... 4245% using the widest term desired in each column. 4246 4247% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 4248% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 4249% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 4250% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 4251 4252% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 4253% if they are. 4254 4255% Sample multitable: 4256 4257% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4258% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 4259% @item 4260% first col stuff 4261% @tab 4262% second col stuff 4263% @tab 4264% third col 4265% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 4266% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 4267% 4268% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 4269% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 4270% @end multitable 4271 4272% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 4273% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 4274% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 4275% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 4276% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 4277% to baseline. 4278% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 4279% 4280\newskip\multitableparskip 4281\newskip\multitableparindent 4282\newdimen\multitablecolspace 4283\newskip\multitablelinespace 4284\multitableparskip=0pt 4285\multitableparindent=6pt 4286\multitablecolspace=12pt 4287\multitablelinespace=0pt 4288 4289% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4290% 4291\let\endsetuptable\relax 4292\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4293\let\columnfractions\relax 4294\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4295\newif\ifsetpercent 4296 4297% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4298% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4299% 4300\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4301 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4302 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4303 \setuptable 4304} 4305 4306\newcount\colcount 4307\def\setuptable#1{% 4308 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4309 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4310 \let\go = \relax 4311 \else 4312 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4313 \global\setpercenttrue 4314 \else 4315 \ifsetpercent 4316 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4317 \else 4318 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4319 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4320 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4321 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4322 \fi 4323 \fi 4324 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4325 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4326 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4327 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4328 \else 4329 \let\go = \setuptable 4330 \fi% 4331 \fi 4332 \go 4333} 4334 4335% multitable-only commands. 4336% 4337% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4338% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4339% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4340% undo it ourselves. 4341\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4342\def\headitem{% 4343 \checkenv\multitable 4344 \crcr 4345 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4346 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4347 \the\everytab % for the first item 4348}% 4349% 4350% default for tables with no headings. 4351\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4352% 4353% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 4354% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 4355% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 4356% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 4357\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4358 4359% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 4360% 4361\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4362% 4363\envdef\multitable{% 4364 \vskip\parskip 4365 \startsavinginserts 4366 % 4367 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4368 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4369 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4370 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4371 \def\item{\crcr}% 4372 % 4373 \tolerance=9500 4374 \hbadness=9500 4375 \setmultitablespacing 4376 \parskip=\multitableparskip 4377 \parindent=\multitableparindent 4378 \overfullrule=0pt 4379 \global\colcount=0 4380 % 4381 \everycr = {% 4382 \noalign{% 4383 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4384 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4385 % 4386 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4387 \checkinserts 4388 % 4389 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4390 \headitemcrhook 4391 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4392 }% 4393 }% 4394 % 4395 \parsearg\domultitable 4396} 4397\def\domultitable#1{% 4398 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4399 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4400 % 4401 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4402 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4403 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4404 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4405 \halign\bgroup &% 4406 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4407 \multistrut 4408 \vtop{% 4409 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 4410 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4411 % 4412 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 4413 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 4414 % the first one. 4415 % 4416 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 4417 % to the width of each template entry. 4418 % 4419 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 4420 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 4421 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 4422 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 4423 % 4424 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 4425 \rightskip=0pt 4426 \ifnum\colcount=1 4427 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 4428 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 4429 \else 4430 \ifsetpercent \else 4431 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 4432 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 4433 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 4434 \fi 4435 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 4436 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 4437 \fi 4438 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 4439 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 4440 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 4441 % For example: 4442 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 4443 % @item @code{#} 4444 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 4445 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 4446 % marking characters. 4447 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 4448 }\cr 4449} 4450\def\Emultitable{% 4451 \crcr 4452 \egroup % end the \halign 4453 \global\setpercentfalse 4454} 4455 4456\def\setmultitablespacing{% 4457 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4458 % 4459 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4460 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4461 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4462 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4463\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4464\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4465\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4466\fi 4467% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4468% table. If not, do nothing. 4469% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4470\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4471\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4472\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4473 % than skip between lines in the table. 4474\fi% 4475\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4476\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4477\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4478 % than skip between lines in the table. 4479\fi} 4480 4481 4482\message{conditionals,} 4483 4484% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4485% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4486% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4487% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4488% attempt to close an environment group. 4489% 4490\def\makecond#1{% 4491 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4492 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4493} 4494\makecond{iftex} 4495\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4496\makecond{ifnothtml} 4497\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4498\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4499\makecond{ifnotxml} 4500 4501% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4502% 4503\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4504\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4505\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4506\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4507\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4508\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4509\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4510\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4511\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4512\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4513\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4514\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4515\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4516 4517% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4518% 4519% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4520\newcount\doignorecount 4521 4522\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4523 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4524 \obeylines 4525 \catcode`\@ = \other 4526 \catcode`\{ = \other 4527 \catcode`\} = \other 4528 % 4529 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4530 \spaceisspace 4531 % 4532 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4533 \doignorecount = 0 4534 % 4535 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4536 \dodoignore{#1}% 4537} 4538 4539{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4540 \obeylines % 4541 % 4542 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4543 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4544 % 4545 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4546 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4547 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4548 % 4549 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4550 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4551 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4552 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4553 % 4554 % And now expand that command. 4555 \doignoretext ^^M% 4556 }% 4557} 4558 4559\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4560 \def\temp{#1}% 4561 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4562 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4563 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4564 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4565 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4566 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4567 \fi 4568 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4569} 4570 4571% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4572% 4573\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4574 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4575 \let\next\enddoignore 4576 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4577 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4578 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4579 \fi 4580 \next 4581} 4582 4583% Finish off ignored text. 4584{ \obeylines% 4585 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4586 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4587 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4588 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4589} 4590 4591 4592% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4593% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4594% 4595% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4596% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4597% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4598% didn't need it. 4599% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4600% 4601\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4602\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4603 {% 4604 \makevalueexpandable 4605 \def\temp{#2}% 4606 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4607 \ifx\temp\empty 4608 \next{}% 4609 \else 4610 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4611 \fi 4612 }% 4613} 4614% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4615\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4616 4617% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4618% 4619\parseargdef\clear{% 4620 {% 4621 \makevalueexpandable 4622 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4623 }% 4624} 4625 4626% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4627\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4628\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4629{ 4630 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4631 % 4632 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4633 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4634 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4635 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4636 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4637 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4638 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4639 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4640 } 4641} 4642 4643% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 4644% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 4645% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 4646% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 4647% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 4648% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 4649% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 4650% 4651% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value* 4652% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr 4653% dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's 4654% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it. 4655% 4656\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4657 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4658 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4659 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4660 \else 4661 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4662 \fi 4663} 4664 4665% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4666% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4667% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4668% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4669% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4670% 4671% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4672\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4673 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4674 \noexpand\value{#1}% 4675 \else 4676 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4677 \fi 4678} 4679 4680% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4681% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4682\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4683 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4684 ZZZZZZZ 4685 \else 4686 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4687 \fi 4688} 4689 4690% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4691% with @set. 4692% 4693% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4694% \makecond and then redefine. 4695% 4696\makecond{ifset} 4697\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4698\def\doifset#1#2{% 4699 {% 4700 \makevalueexpandable 4701 \let\next=\empty 4702 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4703 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4704 \fi 4705 \expandafter 4706 }\next 4707} 4708\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4709 4710% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4711% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4712% 4713% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4714% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4715% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4716% 4717\makecond{ifclear} 4718\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4719\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4720 4721% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4722% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4723% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4724% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4725% 4726\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4727\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4728% 4729\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4730 \makevalueexpandable 4731 \let\next=\empty 4732 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4733 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4734 \fi 4735 \expandafter 4736 }\next 4737} 4738\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4739 4740% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4741\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4742\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4743 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4744\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4745 4746% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4747% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4748\set txicommandconditionals 4749 4750% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4751% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4752\let\dircategory=\comment 4753 4754% @defininfoenclose. 4755\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4756 4757 4758\message{indexing,} 4759% Index generation facilities 4760 4761% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4762% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4763\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4764 4765% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4766% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4767% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4768% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4769% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4770% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4771% for the sake of vms. 4772% 4773\def\newindex#1{% 4774 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4775 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4776 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4777} 4778 4779% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4780% 4781\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4782 4783% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4784% 4785\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4786% 4787\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4788 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4789 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4790 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4791} 4792 4793% The default indices: 4794\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4795\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4796\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4797\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4798\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4799\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4800 4801 4802% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4803% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4804% 4805% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4806% inside @code. 4807% 4808\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4809\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4810 4811% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4812% #3 the target index (bar). 4813\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4814 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4815 % redefine \fooindfile: 4816 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4817 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4818 % redefine \fooindex: 4819 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4820} 4821 4822% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4823% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4824% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4825 4826\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4827\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4828 4829% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4830\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4831\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4832 4833 4834% Used when writing an index entry out to an index file to prevent 4835% expansion of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 4836% 4837\def\indexdummies{% 4838 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 4839 \definedummyletter\@% 4840 \definedummyletter\ % 4841 % 4842 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 4843 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 4844 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 4845 % 4846 % Do the redefinitions. 4847 \definedummies 4848} 4849 4850% Used for the aux and toc files, where @ is the escape character. 4851% 4852\def\atdummies{% 4853 \definedummyletter\@% 4854 \definedummyletter\ % 4855 \definedummyletter\{% 4856 \definedummyletter\}% 4857 % 4858 % Do the redefinitions. 4859 \definedummies 4860 \otherbackslash 4861} 4862 4863% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4864% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4865% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4866% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4867% from whatever follows. 4868% 4869% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4870% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4871% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4872% 4873% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4874% space. 4875% 4876\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4877\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4878\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4879 4880% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies, to effectively prevent 4881% the expansion of commands. 4882% 4883\def\definedummies{% 4884 % 4885 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4886 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4887 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4888 \commondummiesnofonts 4889 % 4890 \definedummyletter\_% 4891 \definedummyletter\-% 4892 % 4893 % Non-English letters. 4894 \definedummyword\AA 4895 \definedummyword\AE 4896 \definedummyword\DH 4897 \definedummyword\L 4898 \definedummyword\O 4899 \definedummyword\OE 4900 \definedummyword\TH 4901 \definedummyword\aa 4902 \definedummyword\ae 4903 \definedummyword\dh 4904 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4905 \definedummyword\l 4906 \definedummyword\o 4907 \definedummyword\oe 4908 \definedummyword\ordf 4909 \definedummyword\ordm 4910 \definedummyword\questiondown 4911 \definedummyword\ss 4912 \definedummyword\th 4913 % 4914 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4915 \definedummyword\bf 4916 \definedummyword\gtr 4917 \definedummyword\hat 4918 \definedummyword\less 4919 \definedummyword\sf 4920 \definedummyword\sl 4921 \definedummyword\tclose 4922 \definedummyword\tt 4923 % 4924 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4925 \definedummyword\TeX 4926 % 4927 % Assorted special characters. 4928 \definedummyword\atchar 4929 \definedummyword\arrow 4930 \definedummyword\bullet 4931 \definedummyword\comma 4932 \definedummyword\copyright 4933 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4934 \definedummyword\dots 4935 \definedummyword\enddots 4936 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4937 \definedummyword\equiv 4938 \definedummyword\error 4939 \definedummyword\euro 4940 \definedummyword\expansion 4941 \definedummyword\geq 4942 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4943 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4944 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4945 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4946 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4947 \definedummyword\leq 4948 \definedummyword\mathopsup 4949 \definedummyword\minus 4950 \definedummyword\ogonek 4951 \definedummyword\pounds 4952 \definedummyword\point 4953 \definedummyword\print 4954 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4955 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4956 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4957 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4958 \definedummyword\quoteright 4959 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4960 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4961 \definedummyword\result 4962 \definedummyword\sub 4963 \definedummyword\sup 4964 \definedummyword\textdegree 4965 % 4966 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4967 \macrolist 4968 \let\value\dummyvalue 4969 % 4970 \normalturnoffactive 4971} 4972 4973% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 4974% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 4975% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 4976% 4977\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4978 % Control letters and accents. 4979 \commondummyletter\!% 4980 \commondummyaccent\"% 4981 \commondummyaccent\'% 4982 \commondummyletter\*% 4983 \commondummyaccent\,% 4984 \commondummyletter\.% 4985 \commondummyletter\/% 4986 \commondummyletter\:% 4987 \commondummyaccent\=% 4988 \commondummyletter\?% 4989 \commondummyaccent\^% 4990 \commondummyaccent\`% 4991 \commondummyaccent\~% 4992 \commondummyword\u 4993 \commondummyword\v 4994 \commondummyword\H 4995 \commondummyword\dotaccent 4996 \commondummyword\ogonek 4997 \commondummyword\ringaccent 4998 \commondummyword\tieaccent 4999 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 5000 \commondummyword\udotaccent 5001 \commondummyword\dotless 5002 % 5003 % Texinfo font commands. 5004 \commondummyword\b 5005 \commondummyword\i 5006 \commondummyword\r 5007 \commondummyword\sansserif 5008 \commondummyword\sc 5009 \commondummyword\slanted 5010 \commondummyword\t 5011 % 5012 % Commands that take arguments. 5013 \commondummyword\abbr 5014 \commondummyword\acronym 5015 \commondummyword\anchor 5016 \commondummyword\cite 5017 \commondummyword\code 5018 \commondummyword\command 5019 \commondummyword\dfn 5020 \commondummyword\dmn 5021 \commondummyword\email 5022 \commondummyword\emph 5023 \commondummyword\env 5024 \commondummyword\file 5025 \commondummyword\image 5026 \commondummyword\indicateurl 5027 \commondummyword\inforef 5028 \commondummyword\kbd 5029 \commondummyword\key 5030 \commondummyword\math 5031 \commondummyword\option 5032 \commondummyword\pxref 5033 \commondummyword\ref 5034 \commondummyword\samp 5035 \commondummyword\strong 5036 \commondummyword\tie 5037 \commondummyword\U 5038 \commondummyword\uref 5039 \commondummyword\url 5040 \commondummyword\var 5041 \commondummyword\verb 5042 \commondummyword\w 5043 \commondummyword\xref 5044} 5045 5046% For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}. 5047\newif\ifusebracesinindexes 5048 5049\let\indexlbrace\relax 5050\let\indexrbrace\relax 5051 5052{\catcode`\@=0 5053\catcode`\\=13 5054 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 5055} 5056 5057{ 5058\catcode`\<=13 5059\catcode`\-=13 5060\catcode`\`=13 5061 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 5062 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 5063 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 5064 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 5065 \let`=\empty 5066 \fi 5067 % 5068 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5069 \backslashdisappear 5070 \fi 5071 % 5072 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5073 \def-{}% 5074 \fi 5075 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5076 \def<{}% 5077 \fi 5078 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5079 \def\@{}% 5080 \fi 5081 } 5082 5083 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5084 \useindexbackslash 5085 \let-\normaldash 5086 \let<\normalless 5087 \def\@{@}% 5088 } 5089} 5090 5091 5092% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5093% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5094% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5095% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5096% 5097\def\indexnofonts{% 5098 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5099 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5100 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5101 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5102 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5103 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5104 \commondummiesnofonts 5105 % 5106 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5107 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5108 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5109 %\let\tt=\asis 5110 % 5111 \def\ { }% 5112 \def\@{@}% 5113 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5114 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5115 % 5116 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5117 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5118 \let\lbracechar\{% 5119 \let\rbracechar\}% 5120 % 5121 % Non-English letters. 5122 \def\AA{AA}% 5123 \def\AE{AE}% 5124 \def\DH{DZZ}% 5125 \def\L{L}% 5126 \def\OE{OE}% 5127 \def\O{O}% 5128 \def\TH{TH}% 5129 \def\aa{aa}% 5130 \def\ae{ae}% 5131 \def\dh{dzz}% 5132 \def\exclamdown{!}% 5133 \def\l{l}% 5134 \def\oe{oe}% 5135 \def\ordf{a}% 5136 \def\ordm{o}% 5137 \def\o{o}% 5138 \def\questiondown{?}% 5139 \def\ss{ss}% 5140 \def\th{th}% 5141 % 5142 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5143 \def\TeX{TeX}% 5144 % 5145 % Assorted special characters. \defglyph gives the control sequence a 5146 % definition that removes the {} that follows its use. 5147 \defglyph\atchar{@}% 5148 \defglyph\arrow{->}% 5149 \defglyph\bullet{bullet}% 5150 \defglyph\comma{,}% 5151 \defglyph\copyright{copyright}% 5152 \defglyph\dots{...}% 5153 \defglyph\enddots{...}% 5154 \defglyph\equiv{==}% 5155 \defglyph\error{error}% 5156 \defglyph\euro{euro}% 5157 \defglyph\expansion{==>}% 5158 \defglyph\geq{>=}% 5159 \defglyph\guillemetleft{<<}% 5160 \defglyph\guillemetright{>>}% 5161 \defglyph\guilsinglleft{<}% 5162 \defglyph\guilsinglright{>}% 5163 \defglyph\leq{<=}% 5164 \defglyph\lbracechar{\{}% 5165 \defglyph\minus{-}% 5166 \defglyph\point{.}% 5167 \defglyph\pounds{pounds}% 5168 \defglyph\print{-|}% 5169 \defglyph\quotedblbase{"}% 5170 \defglyph\quotedblleft{"}% 5171 \defglyph\quotedblright{"}% 5172 \defglyph\quoteleft{`}% 5173 \defglyph\quoteright{'}% 5174 \defglyph\quotesinglbase{,}% 5175 \defglyph\rbracechar{\}}% 5176 \defglyph\registeredsymbol{R}% 5177 \defglyph\result{=>}% 5178 \defglyph\textdegree{o}% 5179 % 5180 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5181 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5182 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5183 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5184 % that starts with \. 5185 % 5186 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5187 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5188 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5189 % 5190 \macrolist 5191 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5192} 5193\def\defglyph#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}} % see above 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 5199 5200% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 5201% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5202\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 5203 5204% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 5205% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 5206% TODO: Two-level index? Operation index? 5207 5208% Workhorse for all indexes. 5209% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 5210% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 5211% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 5212% 5213\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 5214 \iflinks 5215 {% 5216 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5217 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 5218 \toks0 = {#2}% 5219 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 5220 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 5221 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 5222 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 5223 \fi 5224 % 5225 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5226 % 5227 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 5228 }% 5229 \fi 5230} 5231 5232% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5233\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5234\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5235 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5236 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5237 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5238 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5239 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5240 % Open the file 5241 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5242 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5243 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5244 % preceding skips. 5245 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5246\fi} 5247\def\indexisfl{fl} 5248 5249% Output \ as {\indexbackslash}, because \ is an escape character in 5250% the index files. 5251\let\indexbackslash=\relax 5252{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 5253 @gdef@useindexbackslash{@def\{{@indexbackslash}}} 5254} 5255 5256% Definition for writing index entry text. 5257\def\sortas#1{\ignorespaces}% 5258 5259% Definition for writing index entry sort key. Should occur at the at 5260% the beginning of the index entry, like 5261% @cindex @sortas{september} \september 5262% The \ignorespaces takes care of following space, but there's no way 5263% to remove space before it. 5264{ 5265\catcode`\-=13 5266\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5267 \begingroup 5268 \indexnonalnumreappear 5269 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5270\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5271 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5272} 5273 5274 5275% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file. 5276% 5277\def\dosubindwrite{% 5278 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 5279 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5280 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 5281 \fi 5282 % 5283 % Remember, we are within a group. 5284 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 5285 \useindexbackslash % \indexbackslash isn't defined now so it will be output 5286 % as is; and it will print as backslash. 5287 % The braces around \indexbrace are recognized by texindex. 5288 % 5289 % Get the string to sort by, by processing the index entry with all 5290 % font commands turned off. 5291 {\indexnofonts 5292 \def\lbracechar{{\indexlbrace}}% 5293 \def\rbracechar{{\indexrbrace}}% 5294 \let\{=\lbracechar 5295 \let\}=\rbracechar 5296 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5297 \xdef\indexsortkey{}% 5298 \let\sortas=\indexwritesortas 5299 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% 5300 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\temp}% Make sure to execute any \sortas 5301 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty 5302 \xdef\indexsortkey{\temp}% 5303 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5304 \fi 5305 }% 5306 % 5307 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5308 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5309 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5310 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5311 % sorted result. 5312 \edef\temp{% 5313 \write\writeto{% 5314 \string\entry{\indexsortkey}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 5315 }% 5316 \temp 5317} 5318\newbox\dummybox % used above 5319 5320% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5321% 5322% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5323% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5324% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5325% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5326% sequences like this: 5327% @end defun 5328% @tindex whatever 5329% @defun ... 5330% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5331% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5332% the previous defun. 5333% 5334% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5335% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5336% 5337% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5338% 5339% But wait, there is a catch there: 5340% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5341% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5342% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5343% representation of the skip. 5344% 5345% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5346% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5347% 5348\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5349% 5350\newskip\whatsitskip 5351\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5352% 5353% ..., ready, GO: 5354% 5355\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5356 #1% 5357 \else 5358 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5359 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5360 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5361 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5362 % 5363 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5364 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5365 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5366 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5367 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5368 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5369 \else 5370 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5371 \fi 5372 % 5373 #1% 5374 % 5375 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5376 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5377 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5378 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5379 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5380 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5381 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5382 % @vindex index-whatever 5383 % Description. 5384 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5385 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5386 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5387 \else 5388 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5389 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5390 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5391 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5392 \fi 5393\fi} 5394 5395% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5396% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5397% or 5398% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5399% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5400% containing these kinds of lines: 5401% \initial {c} 5402% before the first topic whose initial is c 5403% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5404% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5405% \primary {topic} 5406% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5407% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5408% for each subtopic. 5409 5410% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5411% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5412 5413\def\findex {\fnindex} 5414\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5415\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5416\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5417\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5418\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5419 5420\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 5421{\obeylines % 5422\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 5423\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 5424 5425% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5426 5427% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5428% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5429% 5430\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5431 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5432 % 5433 \smallfonts \rm 5434 \tolerance = 9500 5435 \plainfrenchspacing 5436 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5437 % 5438 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5439 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 5440 % \initial {@} 5441 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 5442 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 5443 \catcode`\@ = 12 5444 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5445 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5446 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5447 \ifeof 1 5448 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5449 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5450 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5451 % there is some text. 5452 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5453 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5454 \else 5455 \catcode`\\ = 0 5456 % 5457 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5458 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5459 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5460 \read 1 to \thisline 5461 \ifeof 1 5462 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5463 \else 5464 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 5465 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 5466 % to make right now. 5467 \def\indexbackslash{\ttbackslash}% 5468 \let\indexlbrace\{ % Likewise, set these sequences for braces 5469 \let\indexrbrace\} % used in the sort key. 5470 \begindoublecolumns 5471 \let\dotheinsertentrybox\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty 5472 % 5473 % Read input from the index file line by line. 5474 \loopdo 5475 \ifeof1 \else 5476 \read 1 to \nextline 5477 \fi 5478 % 5479 \indexinputprocessing 5480 \thisline 5481 % 5482 \ifeof1\else 5483 \let\thisline\nextline 5484 \repeat 5485 %% 5486 \enddoublecolumns 5487 \fi 5488 \fi 5489 \closein 1 5490\endgroup} 5491\def\loopdo#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\loopdoxxx} 5492\def\loopdoxxx{\let\next=\relax\body\let\next=\loopdoxxx\fi\next} 5493 5494\def\indexinputprocessing{% 5495 \ifeof1 5496 \let\firsttoken\relax 5497 \else 5498 \edef\act{\gdef\noexpand\firsttoken{\getfirsttoken\nextline}}% 5499 \act 5500 \fi 5501} 5502\def\getfirsttoken#1{\expandafter\getfirsttokenx#1\endfirsttoken} 5503\long\def\getfirsttokenx#1#2\endfirsttoken{\noexpand#1} 5504 5505 5506% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5507% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5508 5509{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5510\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5511\catcode`\$=3 5512\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5513 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5514 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5515 % for these characters. 5516 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5517 \let\\=\indexbackslash 5518 % 5519 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5520 \catcode`\/=13 5521 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5522 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5523 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5524 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5525 \def\_{% 5526 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5527 \def|{$\vert$}% 5528 \def<{$\less$}% 5529 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5530 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5531}} 5532 5533\def\initial{% 5534 \bgroup 5535 \initialglyphs 5536 \initialx 5537} 5538 5539\def\initialx#1{% 5540 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5541 \removelastskip 5542 % 5543 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5544 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5545 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5546 \nobreak 5547 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5548 \penalty -300 5549 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5550 % 5551 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5552 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5553 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5554 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5555 % 5556 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5557 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5558 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5559 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5560 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5561 % \leftline creates. 5562 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5563 \nobreak 5564 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5565 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5566} 5567 5568\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5569\entryrightmargin=0pt 5570 5571% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5572% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5573% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5574% 5575\def\entry{% 5576 \begingroup 5577 % 5578 % For pdfTeX and XeTeX. 5579 % The redefinition of \domark stops marks being added in \pdflink to 5580 % preserve coloured links across page boundaries. Otherwise the marks 5581 % would get in the way of \lastbox in \insertentrybox. 5582 \let\domark\relax 5583 % 5584 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5585 % affect previous text. 5586 \par 5587 % 5588 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5589 \parskip = 0in 5590 % 5591 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5592 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5593 % titles, for instance. 5594 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5595 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5596 % 5597 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5598 \afterassignment\doentry 5599 \let\temp = 5600} 5601\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5602\def\doentry{% 5603 % Save the text of the entry 5604 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5605 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5606 \noindent 5607 \aftergroup\finishentry 5608 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5609 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5610 % with catcodes occurring. 5611} 5612{\catcode`\@=11 5613\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5614 \egroup % end box A 5615 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5616 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup\unhbox\boxA 5617 % #1 is the page number. 5618 % 5619 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5620 % leaders if they are present. 5621 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5622 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5623 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5624 \else 5625 % 5626 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5627 % 5628 \ifpdf 5629 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5630 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5631 \else 5632 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5633 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5634 \else 5635 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5636 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5637 \fi 5638 \fi 5639 \fi 5640 \egroup % end \boxA 5641 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5642 \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox{\unhbox\boxA}% 5643 \else 5644 \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox\bgroup 5645 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5646 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5647 % 5648 \parindent = 0pt 5649 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5650 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5651 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5652 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5653 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5654 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5655 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5656 % 5657 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5658 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5659 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5660 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5661 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5662 \dimen@i=2.1em 5663 \else 5664 \dimen@i=0em 5665 \fi 5666 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5667 % 5668 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5669 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5670 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5671 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5672 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5673 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5674 % Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of 5675 % the first line. 5676 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ 5677 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5678 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5679 % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than 5680 % two lines), use all the space in the first line. 5681 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5682 \fi 5683 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5684 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5685 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5686 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5687 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5688 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5689 % 5690 % Indent all lines but the first one. 5691 \advance\leftskip by 1em 5692 \advance\parindent by -1em 5693 \fi\fi 5694 \indent % start paragraph 5695 \unhbox\boxA 5696 % 5697 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5698 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5699 % 5700 % Word spacing - no stretch 5701 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5702 % 5703 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5704 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5705 % 5706 \par % format the paragraph 5707 \egroup % The \vbox 5708 \fi 5709 \endgroup 5710 \dotheinsertentrybox 5711}} 5712 5713\newskip\thinshrinkable 5714\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5715 5716\newbox\entrybox 5717\def\insertentrybox{% 5718 \ourunvbox\entrybox 5719} 5720 5721% default definition 5722\let\dotheinsertentrybox\insertentrybox 5723 5724% Use \lastbox to take apart vbox box by box, and add each sub-box 5725% to the current vertical list. 5726\def\ourunvbox#1{% 5727\bgroup % for local binding of \delayedbox 5728 % Remove the last box from box #1 5729 \global\setbox#1=\vbox{% 5730 \unvbox#1% 5731 \unskip % remove any glue 5732 \unpenalty 5733 \global\setbox\interbox=\lastbox 5734 }% 5735 \setbox\delayedbox=\box\interbox 5736 \ifdim\ht#1=0pt\else 5737 \ourunvbox#1 % Repeat on what's left of the box 5738 \nobreak 5739 \fi 5740 \box\delayedbox 5741\egroup 5742} 5743\newbox\delayedbox 5744\newbox\interbox 5745 5746% Used from \printindex. \firsttoken should be the first token 5747% after the \entry. If it's not another \entry, we are at the last 5748% line of a group of index entries, so insert a penalty to discourage 5749% widowed index entries. 5750\def\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty{% 5751 \ifx\firsttoken\isentry 5752 \else 5753 \penalty 9000 5754 \fi 5755 \insertentrybox 5756} 5757\def\isentry{\entry}% 5758 5759% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5760% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5761% the page number to the right. 5762\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5763 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5764 5765 5766\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5767 5768\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 5769\def\secondary#1#2{{% 5770 \parfillskip=0in 5771 \parskip=0in 5772 \hangindent=1in 5773 \hangafter=1 5774 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 5775 \ifpdf 5776 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5777 \else 5778 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5779 #2 5780 \else 5781 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5782 \fi 5783 \fi 5784 \par 5785}} 5786 5787% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5788% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5789% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5790\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5791 5792\newbox\partialpage 5793\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5794 5795% Use inside an output routine to save \topmark and \firstmark 5796\def\savemarks{% 5797 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark }% 5798 \global\savedfirstmark=\expandafter{\firstmark }% 5799} 5800\newtoks\savedtopmark 5801\newtoks\savedfirstmark 5802 5803% Set \topmark and \firstmark for next time \output runs. 5804% Can't be run from withinside \output (because any material 5805% added while an output routine is active, including 5806% penalties, is saved for after it finishes). The page so far 5807% should be empty, otherwise what's on it will be thrown away. 5808\def\restoremarks{% 5809 \mark{\the\savedtopmark}% 5810 \bgroup\output = {% 5811 \setbox\dummybox=\box\PAGE 5812 }abc\eject\egroup 5813 % "abc" because output routine doesn't fire for a completely empty page. 5814 \mark{\the\savedfirstmark}% 5815} 5816 5817\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5818 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5819 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5820 % 5821 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5822 \output = {% 5823 % 5824 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 5825 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 5826 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 5827 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 5828 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 5829 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 5830 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 5831 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 5832 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 5833 \fi 5834 % 5835 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5836 % Unvbox the main output page. 5837 \unvbox\PAGE 5838 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5839 }% 5840 \savemarks 5841 }% 5842 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5843 \restoremarks 5844 % 5845 % We recover the two marks that the last output routine saved in order 5846 % to propagate the information in marks added around a chapter heading, 5847 % which could be otherwise be lost by the time the final page is output. 5848 % 5849 % 5850 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5851 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5852 % 5853 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5854 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5855 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5856 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5857 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5858 % 5859 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5860 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5861 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5862 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5863 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5864 % 5865 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5866 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5867 % been clobbered. 5868 % 5869 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5870 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5871 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5872 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5873 % 5874 % Double the \vsize as well. 5875 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage 5876 \vsize = 2\vsize 5877 % 5878 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5879 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5880} 5881 5882% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5883% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5884% 5885\def\doublecolumnout{% 5886 % 5887 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5888 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5889 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5890 % previous page. 5891 \dimen@ = \vsize 5892 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5893 % 5894 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5895 \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ 5896 \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage 5897 \onepageout\pagesofar 5898 \unvbox\PAGE 5899 \penalty\outputpenalty 5900} 5901% 5902% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5903% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5904\def\pagesofar{% 5905 \unvbox\partialpage 5906 % 5907 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5908 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5909 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5910} 5911 5912 5913% Finished with with double columns. 5914\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5915 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5916 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5917 % following situation: 5918 % 5919 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5920 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5921 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5922 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5923 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5924 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5925 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5926 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5927 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5928 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5929 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5930 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5931 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5932 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5933 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5934 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5935 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5936 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5937 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5938 % 5939 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5940 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5941 \penalty0 5942 % 5943 \output = {% 5944 % Split the last of the double-column material. 5945 \savemarks 5946 \balancecolumns 5947 }% 5948 \eject % call the \output just set 5949 \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt 5950 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5951 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5952 % definition right away. 5953 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 5954 % 5955 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5956 \restoremarks 5957 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 5958 % page break. 5959 \box\balancedcolumns 5960 % 5961 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5962 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5963 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. 5964 \global\vsize = \txipageheight % 5965 \pagegoal = \txipageheight % 5966 \else 5967 % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout 5968 % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again. 5969 \expandafter\enddoublecolumns 5970 \fi 5971} 5972\newbox\balancedcolumns 5973\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 5974% 5975% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 5976% does the others. 5977\def\balancecolumns{% 5978 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5979 \dimen@ = \ht0 5980 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5981 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5982 \ifdim\dimen@<5\baselineskip 5983 % Don't split a short final column in two. 5984 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 5985 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5986 \else 5987 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 5988 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 5989 \splittopskip = \topskip 5990 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 5991 {% 5992 \vbadness = 10000 5993 \loop 5994 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 5995 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 5996 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 5997 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 5998 \repeat 5999 }% 6000 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 6001 % 6002 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 6003 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 6004 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 6005 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 6006 % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material. 6007 % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page. 6008 \setbox\PAGE=\box0 6009 \doublecolumnout 6010 \else 6011 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 6012 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 6013 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 6014 % flush with each other. 6015 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 6016 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 6017 \else 6018 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 6019 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 6020 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 6021 \fi 6022 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 6023 \fi 6024 \fi 6025 % 6026} 6027\catcode`\@ = \other 6028 6029 6030\message{sectioning,} 6031% Chapters, sections, etc. 6032 6033% Let's start with @part. 6034\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 6035\def\partzzz#1{% 6036 \chapoddpage 6037 \null 6038 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 6039 \begingroup 6040 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 6041 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 6042 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 6043 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 6044 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 6045 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 6046 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 6047 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6048 \chapoddpage 6049 \endgroup 6050} 6051 6052% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 6053% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 6054% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 6055% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 6056% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 6057\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 6058\newcount\chapno 6059\newcount\secno \secno=0 6060\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 6061\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 6062 6063% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 6064\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 6065% 6066% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 6067% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 6068% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 6069% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6070% 6071\def\appendixletter{% 6072 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6073 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6074 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6075 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6076 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6077 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6078 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6079 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6080 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6081 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6082 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6083 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6084 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6085 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6086 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6087 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6088 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6089 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6090 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6091 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6092 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6093 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6094 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6095 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6096 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6097 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6098 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6099 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6100 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6101 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6102 \else\char\the\appendixno 6103 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6104 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6105 6106% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6107% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6108% these. @section does likewise. 6109\def\thischapter{} 6110\def\thischapternum{} 6111\def\thischaptername{} 6112\def\thissection{} 6113\def\thissectionnum{} 6114\def\thissectionname{} 6115 6116\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6117\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6118 6119% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6120\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6121\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 6122 6123% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6124\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6125\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 6126 6127% we only have subsub. 6128\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6129% 6130% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6131% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6132\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6133% 6134% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6135% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6136\def\chapheadtype{N} 6137 6138% Choose a heading macro 6139% #1 is heading type 6140% #2 is heading level 6141% #3 is text for heading 6142\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6143 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6144 \absseclevel=#2 6145 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6146 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6147 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6148 \absseclevel = 0 6149 \else 6150 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6151 \absseclevel = 3 6152 \fi 6153 \fi 6154 % The heading type: 6155 \def\headtype{#1}% 6156 \if \headtype U% 6157 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6158 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6159 \fi 6160 \else 6161 % Check for appendix sections: 6162 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6163 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6164 \else 6165 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6166 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6167 \fi\fi 6168 \fi 6169 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6170 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6171 \def\headtype{U}% 6172 \else 6173 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6174 \fi 6175 \fi 6176 % Now print the heading: 6177 \if \headtype U% 6178 \ifcase\absseclevel 6179 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6180 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6181 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6182 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6183 \fi 6184 \else 6185 \if \headtype A% 6186 \ifcase\absseclevel 6187 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6188 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6189 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6190 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6191 \fi 6192 \else 6193 \ifcase\absseclevel 6194 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6195 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6196 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6197 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6198 \fi 6199 \fi 6200 \fi 6201 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6202} 6203 6204% an interface: 6205\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6206\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6207\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6208 6209% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6210% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6211% 6212% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6213% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6214\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6215% 6216\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6217\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6218 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6219 % as an @include file. 6220 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6221 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6222 % 6223 % Used for \float. 6224 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6225 \resetallfloatnos 6226 % 6227 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6228 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6229 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6230 % 6231 % Write the actual heading. 6232 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6233 % 6234 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6235 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6236 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6237 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6238} 6239 6240\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6241% 6242\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6243 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6244 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6245 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6246 \resetallfloatnos 6247 % 6248 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6249 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6250 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6251 % 6252 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6253 % 6254 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6255 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6256 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6257} 6258 6259% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6260\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6261\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6262 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6263 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6264 % 6265 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6266 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6267 \resetallfloatnos 6268 % 6269 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6270 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6271 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6272 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6273 % to be executed, not expanded). 6274 % 6275 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6276 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6277 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6278 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6279 % the toc entries.) 6280 \toks0 = {#1}% 6281 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6282 % 6283 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6284 % 6285 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6286 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6287 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6288} 6289 6290% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6291\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6292 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6293 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6294 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6295} 6296 6297% @top is like @unnumbered. 6298\let\top\unnumbered 6299 6300% Sections. 6301% 6302\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6303\def\seczzz#1{% 6304 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6305 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6306} 6307 6308% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6309\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6310\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6311 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6312 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6313} 6314\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6315 6316% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6317\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6318\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6319 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6320 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6321} 6322 6323% Subsections. 6324% 6325% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6326\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6327\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6328 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6329 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6330} 6331 6332% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6333\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6334\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6335 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6336 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6337 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6338} 6339 6340% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6341\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6342\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6343 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6344 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6345 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6346} 6347 6348% Subsubsections. 6349% 6350% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6351\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6352\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6353 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6354 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6355 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6356} 6357 6358% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6359\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6360\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6361 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6362 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6363 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6364} 6365 6366% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6367\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6368\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6369 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6370 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6371 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6372} 6373 6374% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6375% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6376% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6377\let\section = \numberedsec 6378\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6379\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6380 6381% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6382 6383\def\majorheading{% 6384 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6385 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6386} 6387 6388\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6389\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6390 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6391 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6392 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6393} 6394 6395% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6396\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6397 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6398\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6399 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6400\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6401 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6402 6403% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6404% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6405% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6406 6407% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6408\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6409 6410% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6411\newskip\chapheadingskip 6412 6413% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6414\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6415 6416% Start a new page 6417\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6418 6419% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6420% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6421% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6422% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6423\def\chapoddpage{% 6424 \chappager 6425 \ifodd\pageno \else 6426 \begingroup 6427 \headingsoff 6428 \null 6429 \chappager 6430 \endgroup 6431 \fi 6432} 6433 6434\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6435 6436\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6437\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6438\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6439\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 6440 6441\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6442\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6443\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6444\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 6445\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6446 6447\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6448\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6449\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6450\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 6451\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6452 6453\CHAPPAGon 6454 6455% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6456% 6457% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6458% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6459% Not used for @heading series. 6460% 6461% To test against our argument. 6462\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6463\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6464\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6465% 6466\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6467 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6468 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6469 \fi 6470 % FIXME: \chapmacro is currently called from inside \titlepage when 6471 % \setcontentsaftertitlepage to print the "Table of Contents" heading, but 6472 % this should probably be done by \sectionheading with an option to print 6473 % in chapter size. 6474 % 6475 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6476 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 6477 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6478 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6479 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6480 % 6481 \def\temptype{#2}% 6482 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6483 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6484 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6485 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6486 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6487 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6488 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6489 \toks0={#1}% 6490 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 6491 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6492 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6493 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6494 % commands in some of the translations. 6495 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6496 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6497 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6498 }% 6499 \else 6500 \toks0={#1}% 6501 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 6502 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6503 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6504 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6505 % commands in some of the translations. 6506 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6507 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6508 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6509 }% 6510 \fi\fi\fi 6511 % 6512 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6513 % the preceding space. 6514 \safewhatsit\domark 6515 % 6516 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6517 \pchapsepmacro 6518 % 6519 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6520 % between here and the heading. 6521 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 6522 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6523 \domark 6524 % 6525 {% 6526 \chapfonts \rm 6527 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6528 % 6529 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6530 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6531 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6532 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6533 % 6534 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6535 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6536 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6537 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6538 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6539 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6540 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6541 \def\toctype{omit}% 6542 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6543 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6544 \def\toctype{app}% 6545 \else 6546 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6547 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6548 \fi\fi\fi 6549 % 6550 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6551 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6552 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6553 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6554 % 6555 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6556 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6557 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6558 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6559 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6560 \donoderef{#2}% 6561 % 6562 % Typeset the actual heading. 6563 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6564 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6565 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6566 }% 6567 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6568 \nobreak 6569} 6570 6571% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6572\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6573\def\centerparameters{% 6574 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6575 \leftskip = \rightskip 6576 \parfillskip = 0pt 6577} 6578 6579 6580% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6581% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6582% 6583\newskip\secheadingskip 6584\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6585 6586% Subsection titles. 6587\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6588\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6589 6590% Subsubsection titles. 6591\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6592\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6593 6594 6595% Print any size, any type, section title. 6596% 6597% #1 is the text of the title, 6598% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6599% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6600% #4 is the section number. 6601% 6602\def\seckeyword{sec} 6603% 6604\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6605 {% 6606 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6607 \def\temptype{#3}% 6608 % 6609 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6610 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6611 % dubious), but not the others. 6612 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6613 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6614 \fi 6615 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6616 % 6617 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6618 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6619 % 6620 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6621 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6622 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6623 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6624 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6625 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6626 \fi 6627 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6628 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6629 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6630 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6631 \toks0={#1}% 6632 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 6633 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6634 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6635 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6636 % commands in some of the translations. 6637 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6638 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6639 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6640 }% 6641 \fi 6642 \else 6643 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6644 \toks0={#1}% 6645 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 6646 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6647 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6648 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6649 % commands in some of the translations. 6650 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6651 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6652 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6653 }% 6654 \fi 6655 \fi\fi\fi 6656 % 6657 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6658 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6659 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6660 \par 6661 % 6662 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6663 % the preceding space. 6664 \safewhatsit\domark 6665 % 6666 % Insert space above the heading. 6667 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6668 % 6669 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6670 % between here and the heading. 6671 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6672 \domark 6673 % 6674 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6675 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6676 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6677 \def\toctype{unn}% 6678 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6679 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6680 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6681 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 6682 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6683 \def\toctype{omit}% 6684 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6685 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6686 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6687 \def\toctype{app}% 6688 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6689 \else 6690 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6691 \def\toctype{num}% 6692 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6693 \fi\fi\fi 6694 % 6695 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6696 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6697 % 6698 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6699 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6700 \donoderef{#3}% 6701 % 6702 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6703 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6704 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6705 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6706 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6707 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6708 \nobreak 6709 % 6710 % Output the actual section heading. 6711 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6712 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6713 \unhbox0 #1}% 6714 }% 6715 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6716 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6717 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6718 % 6719 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6720 % was followed by glue. 6721 \nobreak 6722 % 6723 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6724 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6725 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6726 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6727 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6728 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6729 \vskip-\parskip 6730 % 6731 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6732 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6733 % and do the needful. 6734 \penalty 10001 6735} 6736 6737 6738\message{toc,} 6739% Table of contents. 6740\newwrite\tocfile 6741 6742% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6743% Called from @chapter, etc. 6744% 6745% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6746% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6747% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6748% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6749% destination to jump to. 6750% 6751% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6752% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6753% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6754% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6755% 6756\newif\iftocfileopened 6757\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6758% 6759\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6760 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6761 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6762 \iftocfileopened\else 6763 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6764 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6765 \fi 6766 % 6767 \iflinks 6768 {\atdummies 6769 \edef\temp{% 6770 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6771 \temp 6772 }% 6773 \fi 6774 \fi 6775 % 6776 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6777 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6778 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6779 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6780 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6781 % `1', and two named `2'. 6782 \ifpdf 6783 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6784 \else 6785 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 6786 \else 6787 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6788 \fi 6789 \fi 6790} 6791 6792 6793% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6794% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6795% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6796% 6797\def\activecatcodes{% 6798 \catcode`\"=\active 6799 \catcode`\$=\active 6800 \catcode`\<=\active 6801 \catcode`\>=\active 6802 \catcode`\\=\active 6803 \catcode`\^=\active 6804 \catcode`\_=\active 6805 \catcode`\|=\active 6806 \catcode`\~=\active 6807} 6808 6809 6810% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6811\def\readtocfile{% 6812 \setupdatafile 6813 \activecatcodes 6814 \input \tocreadfilename 6815} 6816 6817\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6818\newcount\savepageno 6819\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6820 6821% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6822% 6823\def\startcontents#1{% 6824 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6825 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 6826 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 6827 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 6828 \contentsalignmacro 6829 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6830 % 6831 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6832 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6833 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6834 % 6835 \savepageno = \pageno 6836 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6837 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6838 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6839 % 6840 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6841 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6842} 6843 6844% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6845% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6846% 6847\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6848 6849% Normal (long) toc. 6850% 6851\def\contents{% 6852 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6853 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6854 \ifeof 1 \else 6855 \readtocfile 6856 \fi 6857 \vfill \eject 6858 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6859 \ifeof 1 \else 6860 \pdfmakeoutlines 6861 \fi 6862 \closein 1 6863 \endgroup 6864 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6865 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6866} 6867 6868% And just the chapters. 6869\def\summarycontents{% 6870 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6871 % 6872 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6873 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6874 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6875 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6876 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6877 \secfonts 6878 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6879 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6880 \rm 6881 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6882 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6883 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6884 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6885 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6886 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6887 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6888 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6889 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6890 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6891 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6892 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6893 \ifeof 1 \else 6894 \readtocfile 6895 \fi 6896 \closein 1 6897 \vfill \eject 6898 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6899 \endgroup 6900 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6901 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6902} 6903\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6904 6905% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6906% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6907% 6908\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6909 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6910 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6911 % But use \hss just in case. 6912 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6913 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6914 % 6915 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6916 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6917 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6918 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6919 % there are before deciding ... 6920 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6921} 6922 6923% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6924% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6925% The last argument is the page number. 6926% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6927 6928% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6929% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6930% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6931\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6932\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{% 6933 % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading. 6934 % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the 6935 % part heading, before a following chapter heading. 6936 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 6937 \penalty-300 6938 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 6939 \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}% 6940} 6941% 6942% Parts, in the short toc. 6943\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6944 \penalty-300 6945 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6946 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6947} 6948 6949% Chapters, in the main contents. 6950\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6951 6952% Chapters, in the short toc. 6953% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6954\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6955 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6956} 6957 6958% Appendices, in the main contents. 6959% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6960% 6961\def\appendixbox#1{% 6962 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6963 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6964 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6965% 6966\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 6967 6968% Unnumbered chapters. 6969\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6970\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6971 6972% Sections. 6973\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6974\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6975\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6976 6977% Subsections. 6978\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6979\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6980\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6981 6982% And subsubsections. 6983\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6984\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6985\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6986 6987% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6988% Same as \defaultparindent. 6989\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6990 6991% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6992% page number. 6993% 6994% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 6995% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 6996\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 6997 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 6998 \begingroup 6999 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 7000 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 7001 \chapentryfonts 7002 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7003 \endgroup 7004 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 7005} 7006 7007\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7008 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 7009 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7010\endgroup} 7011 7012\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7013 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 7014 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7015\endgroup} 7016 7017\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7018 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 7019 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7020\endgroup} 7021 7022% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 7023\let\tocentry = \entry 7024 7025% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 7026\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 7027 7028\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7029\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7030 7031\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 7032\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 7033\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7034\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7035 7036 7037\message{environments,} 7038% @foo ... @end foo. 7039 7040% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 7041% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 7042% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 7043 7044\envdef\tex{% 7045 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 7046 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 7047 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 7048 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 7049 \catcode `\%=14 7050 \catcode `\+=\other 7051 \catcode `\"=\other 7052 \catcode `\|=\other 7053 \catcode `\<=\other 7054 \catcode `\>=\other 7055 \catcode `\`=\other 7056 \catcode `\'=\other 7057 % 7058 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 7059 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 7060 \mathactive 7061 % 7062 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 7063 \let\b=\ptexb 7064 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 7065 \let\c=\ptexc 7066 \let\,=\ptexcomma 7067 \let\.=\ptexdot 7068 \let\dots=\ptexdots 7069 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 7070 \let\!=\ptexexclam 7071 \let\i=\ptexi 7072 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7073 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7074 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7075 \let\+=\tabalign 7076 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7077 \let\/=\ptexslash 7078 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7079 \let\*=\ptexstar 7080 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7081 \let\t=\ptext 7082 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7083 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7084 % 7085 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7086 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7087 \def\@{@}% 7088} 7089% There is no need to define \Etex. 7090 7091% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7092% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7093% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7094 7095% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7096\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7097 7098% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7099% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7100% have any width. 7101\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7102 7103% This space is always present above and below environments. 7104\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7105 7106% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7107% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7108% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7109% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7110% 7111\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7112 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7113 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7114 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7115 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7116 \endgraf 7117 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7118 \removelastskip 7119 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7120 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7121 % often leads into it. 7122 \penalty100 7123 \fi 7124 \vskip\envskipamount 7125 \fi 7126 \fi 7127}} 7128 7129\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7130 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7131 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7132 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7133 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7134 \endgraf 7135 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7136 \removelastskip 7137 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7138 % or better ... 7139 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7140 \vskip\envskipamount 7141 \fi 7142 \fi 7143}} 7144 7145% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7146% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7147\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7148 7149% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7150% environment contents. 7151\font\circle=lcircle10 7152\newdimen\circthick 7153\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7154\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7155\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7156% 7157\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7158\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7159\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7160\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7161\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7162 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7163 \hskip\rskip}} 7164\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7165 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7166 \hskip\rskip}} 7167% 7168\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7169 7170\envdef\cartouche{% 7171 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7172 \startsavinginserts 7173 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7174 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7175 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7176 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7177 \cartouter=\hsize 7178 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7179 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7180 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7181 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7182 % 7183 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7184 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7185 % collide with the section heading. 7186 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7187 % 7188 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7189 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7190 \carttop 7191 \hbox\bgroup 7192 \hskip\lskip 7193 \vrule\kern3pt 7194 \vbox\bgroup 7195 \kern3pt 7196 \hsize=\cartinner 7197 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7198 \lineskip=\normlskip 7199 \parskip=\normpskip 7200 \vskip -\parskip 7201 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7202} 7203\def\Ecartouche{% 7204 \ifhmode\par\fi 7205 \kern3pt 7206 \egroup 7207 \kern3pt\vrule 7208 \hskip\rskip 7209 \egroup 7210 \cartbot 7211 \egroup 7212 \addgroupbox 7213 \checkinserts 7214} 7215 7216 7217% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7218% inside a group. 7219\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7220\def\nonfillstart{% 7221 \aboveenvbreak 7222 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7223 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7224 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7225 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7226 \parskip = 0pt 7227 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7228 % the normal \indent. 7229 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7230 \parindent = 0pt 7231 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7232 % 7233 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7234 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7235 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7236 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7237 \else 7238 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7239 \fi 7240 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7241} 7242 7243\begingroup 7244\obeyspaces 7245% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7246% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7247% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7248% @indent. 7249\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7250\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7251\ifx\temp % 7252\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7253\else% 7254\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7255\fi% 7256}% 7257\endgroup 7258\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7259\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7260 7261% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7262% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7263% This affects the following displayed environments: 7264% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 7265% 7266\def\smallword{small} 7267\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7268\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7269\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7270 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7271 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7272 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7273 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7274 % to change the fonts afterward. 7275 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7276 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7277 \fi 7278} 7279\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7280 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7281 \else 7282 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7283 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7284 \fi 7285} 7286 7287% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7288% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7289\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7290 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7291 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7292 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7293 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7294} 7295 7296% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7297\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7298 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7299 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7300} 7301% 7302% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7303% @example: same as @lisp. 7304% 7305% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7306% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7307% 7308\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7309 \nonfillstart 7310 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 7311 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7312 \gobble % eat return 7313} 7314% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7315% 7316\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7317 \nonfillstart 7318 \gobble 7319} 7320 7321% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7322% 7323\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7324 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7325 \nonfillstart 7326 \gobble 7327} 7328 7329% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7330\envdef\flushleft{% 7331 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7332 \nonfillstart 7333 \gobble 7334} 7335\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7336 7337% @flushright. 7338% 7339\envdef\flushright{% 7340 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7341 \nonfillstart 7342 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7343 \gobble 7344} 7345\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7346 7347 7348% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7349% justification. From plain.tex. Don't stretch around special 7350% characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right 7351% should be enough. 7352\envdef\raggedright{% 7353 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7354 \def\urefprestretchamount{0pt}% 7355 \def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt}% 7356} 7357\let\Eraggedright\par 7358 7359\envdef\raggedleft{% 7360 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7361 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7362 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7363 % badness reporting. 7364} 7365\let\Eraggedleft\par 7366 7367\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7368 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7369 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7370 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7371 % badness reporting. 7372} 7373\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7374 7375 7376% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7377% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7378% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7379% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7380% 7381\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7382% 7383\def\quotationstart{% 7384 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7385 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7386 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7387 \fi 7388 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7389} 7390 7391% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7392% doing normal filling. 7393% 7394\def\Equotation{% 7395 \par 7396 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7397 % indent a bit. 7398 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7399 \fi 7400 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7401} 7402\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7403 7404% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7405\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7406 \def\temp{#1}% 7407 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7408 {\bf #1: }% 7409 \fi 7410} 7411 7412% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7413% has no optional argument. 7414% 7415\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7416% 7417\def\indentedblockstart{% 7418 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7419 \parindent=0pt 7420 % 7421 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7422 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7423 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7424 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7425 \else 7426 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7427 \fi 7428} 7429 7430% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7431% 7432\def\Eindentedblock{% 7433 \par 7434 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7435} 7436\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7437 7438 7439% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7440% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7441% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7442% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 7443% 7444% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7445% 7446% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7447% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7448% verbatim line. 7449\def\dospecials{% 7450 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7451 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7452 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7453 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7454 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7455 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7456 %\do\`\do\'% 7457} 7458% 7459% [Knuth] p. 380 7460\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7461 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7462% 7463% Setup for the @verb command. 7464% 7465% Eight spaces for a tab 7466\begingroup 7467 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7468 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7469\endgroup 7470% 7471\def\setupverb{% 7472 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7473 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7474 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 7475 \tabeightspaces 7476 % Respect line breaks, 7477 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7478 % make each space count 7479 % must do in this order: 7480 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7481} 7482 7483% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7484% 7485% Real tab expansion. 7486\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7487% 7488% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7489% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, 7490% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the 7491% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before 7492% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands 7493% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. 7494\newbox\verbbox 7495\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7496% 7497\begingroup 7498 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7499 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7500 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7501 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7502 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7503 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7504 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7505 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7506 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox 7507 }% 7508 } 7509\endgroup 7510 7511% start the verbatim environment. 7512\def\setupverbatim{% 7513 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7514 \nonfillstart 7515 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7516 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would 7517 % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. 7518 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% 7519 \tabexpand 7520 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 7521 % Respect line breaks, 7522 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7523 % make each space count. 7524 % Must do in this order: 7525 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7526 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 7527} 7528 7529% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7530% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7531% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7532% 7533% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7534% 7535% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7536\begingroup 7537 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7538 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7539\endgroup 7540% 7541\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7542% 7543% 7544% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7545% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7546% 7547% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7548% 7549% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7550% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7551% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7552% 7553% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7554% 7555\begingroup 7556 \catcode`\ =\active 7557 \obeylines % 7558 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7559 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7560 % line in the output. 7561 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7562 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7563 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7564\endgroup 7565% 7566\envdef\verbatim{% 7567 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 7568} 7569\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7570 7571 7572% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7573% 7574\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7575% 7576\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7577 {% 7578 \makevalueexpandable 7579 \setupverbatim 7580 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7581 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7582 \input #1 7583 \afterenvbreak 7584 }% 7585} 7586 7587% @copying ... @end copying. 7588% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7589% 7590% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7591% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7592% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7593% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7594% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7595% possible is desirable. 7596% 7597\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7598\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7599% 7600\def\insertcopying{% 7601 \begingroup 7602 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7603 \scanexp\copyingtext 7604 \endgroup 7605} 7606 7607 7608\message{defuns,} 7609% @defun etc. 7610 7611\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7612\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7613\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7614\newcount\defunpenalty 7615 7616% Start the processing of @deffn: 7617\def\startdefun{% 7618 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7619 \medbreak 7620 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7621 % following @def command, see below. 7622 \else 7623 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7624 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7625 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7626 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7627 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7628 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7629 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7630 % 7631 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7632 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7633 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7634 % @def command. 7635 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7636 % 7637 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7638 % But do insert the glue. 7639 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7640 \fi 7641 % 7642 \parindent=0in 7643 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7644 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7645} 7646 7647\def\dodefunx#1{% 7648 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7649 \checkenv#1% 7650 % 7651 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7652 % It's not a great place, though. 7653 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7654 % 7655 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7656 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7657} 7658\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7659 7660% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7661% 7662\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7663 \begingroup 7664 % call \deffnheader: 7665 #1#2 \endheader 7666 % common ending: 7667 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7668 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7669 \endgraf 7670 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7671 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7672 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7673 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7674 \checkparencounts 7675 \endgroup 7676} 7677 7678\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7679 7680% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7681% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7682% 7683\def\makedefun#1{% 7684 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7685 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7686 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7687 \temp 7688} 7689 7690% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7691% 7692% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7693% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7694% 7695\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7696 \envdef#1{% 7697 \startdefun 7698 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7699 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7700 }% 7701 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7702 \def#3% 7703} 7704 7705\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7706\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7707 7708% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7709% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7710% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7711% 7712\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7713 \def\temp{#1}% 7714 \ifx\temp\onword 7715 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7716 = \empty 7717 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7718 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7719 = \relax 7720 \else 7721 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7722 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7723 must be on|off}% 7724 \fi\fi 7725} 7726 7727% Untyped functions: 7728 7729% @deffn category name args 7730\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7731 7732% @deffn category class name args 7733\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7734 7735% \defopon {category on}class name args 7736\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7737 7738% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7739% 7740\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7741 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 7742 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7743 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7744} 7745 7746% Typed functions: 7747 7748% @deftypefn category type name args 7749\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7750 7751% @deftypeop category class type name args 7752\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7753 7754% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7755\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7756 7757% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7758% 7759\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7760 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7761 \doingtypefntrue 7762 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7763} 7764 7765% Typed variables: 7766 7767% @deftypevr category type var args 7768\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7769 7770% @deftypecv category class type var args 7771\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7772 7773% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7774\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7775 7776% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7777% 7778\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7779 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7780 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7781} 7782 7783% Untyped variables: 7784 7785% @defvr category var args 7786\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7787 7788% @defcv category class var args 7789\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7790 7791% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7792\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7793 7794% Types: 7795 7796% @deftp category name args 7797\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7798 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7799 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7800} 7801 7802% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7803\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7804\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7805\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7806\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7807\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7808\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7809\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7810\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7811\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7812\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7813\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7814 7815% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7816% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7817% #2 is the return type, if any. 7818% #3 is the function name. 7819% 7820% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7821% 7822\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7823 \par 7824 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7825 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7826 % 7827 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7828 % on a line by itself. 7829 \rettypeownlinefalse 7830 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7831 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7832 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7833 \rettypeownlinetrue 7834 \fi 7835 \fi 7836 % 7837 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7838 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7839 % just below it. 7840 \def\temp{#1}% 7841 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7842 % 7843 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7844 % least two. 7845 \tempnum = 2 7846 % 7847 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7848 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7849 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7850 % 7851 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7852 \ifrettypeownline 7853 \advance\tempnum by 1 7854 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7855 \else 7856 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7857 \fi 7858 % 7859 % The continuations: 7860 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7861 % 7862 % The final paragraph shape: 7863 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7864 % 7865 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7866 \noindent 7867 \hbox to 0pt{% 7868 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7869 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7870 \kern\leftskip 7871 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7872 }% 7873 % 7874 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7875 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7876 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7877 {% 7878 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7879 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7880 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7881 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7882 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7883 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7884 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7885 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7886 \df \tt 7887 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7888 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7889 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7890 \ifrettypeownline 7891 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7892 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7893 \else 7894 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7895 \fi 7896 \fi % no return type 7897 #3% output function name 7898 }% 7899 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7900 % 7901 \boldbrax 7902 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7903} 7904 7905% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7906% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7907% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7908% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7909% 7910\def\defunargs#1{% 7911 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7912 % tt for the names. 7913 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7914 % 7915 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7916 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7917 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7918 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7919 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7920 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7921 #1% 7922 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7923} 7924 7925% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7926% 7927\def\activeparens{% 7928 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7929 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7930 \catcode`\&=\active 7931} 7932 7933% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7934\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7935 7936% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7937% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7938% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7939{ 7940 \activeparens 7941 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7942 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7943 \global\let& = \& 7944 7945 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7946 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7947} 7948\let\ampchar\& 7949 7950\newcount\parencount 7951 7952% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7953\newif\ifampseen 7954\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7955 7956\def\parenfont{% 7957 \ifampseen 7958 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7959 % otherwise use the default font. 7960 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7961 \else 7962 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7963 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7964 \sf 7965 \fi 7966} 7967\def\infirstlevel#1{% 7968 \ifampseen 7969 \ifnum\parencount=1 7970 #1% 7971 \fi 7972 \fi 7973} 7974\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7975 7976\def\opnr{% 7977 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7978 {\parenfont(}% 7979 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7980} 7981\def\clnr{% 7982 {\parenfont)}% 7983 \infirstlevel \sl 7984 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7985} 7986 7987\newcount\brackcount 7988\def\lbrb{% 7989 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7990 {\bf[}% 7991} 7992\def\rbrb{% 7993 {\bf]}% 7994 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 7995} 7996 7997\def\checkparencounts{% 7998 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 7999 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 8000} 8001% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 8002% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 8003\def\badparencount{% 8004 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 8005 \global\parencount=0 8006} 8007\def\badbrackcount{% 8008 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 8009 \global\brackcount=0 8010} 8011 8012 8013\message{macros,} 8014% @macro. 8015 8016% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 8017% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 8018\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8019 \newwrite\macscribble 8020 \def\scantokens#1{% 8021 \toks0={#1}% 8022 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 8023 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 8024 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 8025 \input \jobname.tmp 8026 } 8027\fi 8028 8029% alias because \c means cedilla in @tex or @math 8030\let\texinfoc=\c 8031 8032\newcount\savedcatcodeone 8033\newcount\savedcatcodetwo 8034 8035% Used at the time of macro expansion. 8036% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 8037\def\scanmacro#1{% 8038 \newlinechar`\^^M 8039 \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}% 8040 % 8041 % Temporarily undo catcode changes of \printindex. Set catcode of @ to 8042 % 0 so that @-commands in macro expansions aren't printed literally when 8043 % formatting an index file, where \ is used as the escape character. 8044 \savedcatcodeone=\catcode`\@ 8045 \savedcatcodetwo=\catcode`\\ 8046 \catcode`\@=0 8047 \catcode`\\=\active 8048 % 8049 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 8050 \scantokens{#1@texinfoc}% 8051 % 8052 \catcode`\@=\savedcatcodeone 8053 \catcode`\\=\savedcatcodetwo 8054 % 8055 % The \texinfoc is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 8056 % can be noticed by \parsearg. 8057 % We avoid surrounding the call to \scantokens with \bgroup and \egroup 8058 % to allow macros to open or close groups themselves. 8059} 8060 8061% Used for copying and captions 8062\def\scanexp#1{% 8063 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 8064} 8065 8066\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8067\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8068\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8069 8070% List of all defined macros in the form 8071% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8072% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8073% if there is a need. 8074\def\macrolist{} 8075 8076% Add the macro to \macrolist 8077\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8078\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8079 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8080 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8081} 8082 8083% Utility routines. 8084% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8085% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8086% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8087% 8088\def\cslet#1#2{% 8089 \expandafter\let 8090 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8091 \csname#2\endcsname 8092} 8093 8094% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8095% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8096{\catcode`\@=11 8097\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8098\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8099\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8100\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8101\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8102} 8103 8104% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8105{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8106\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8107\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8108\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8109} 8110 8111% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8112% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8113% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8114% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8115% 8116% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8117% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8118% confine the change to the current group. 8119% 8120% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8121% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8122% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8123% 8124\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8125 \catcode`\"=\other 8126 \catcode`\+=\other 8127 \catcode`\<=\other 8128 \catcode`\>=\other 8129 \catcode`\^=\other 8130 \catcode`\_=\other 8131 \catcode`\|=\other 8132 \catcode`\~=\other 8133 \passthroughcharstrue 8134} 8135 8136\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8137 \scanctxt 8138 \catcode`\@=\other 8139 \catcode`\\=\other 8140 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8141} 8142 8143\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8144 \scanctxt 8145 \catcode`\ =\other 8146 \catcode`\@=\other 8147 \catcode`\{=\other 8148 \catcode`\}=\other 8149 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8150 \usembodybackslash 8151} 8152 8153% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8154% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8155% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8156\def\macroargctxt{% 8157 \scanctxt 8158 \catcode`\ =\active 8159 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8160 \catcode`\\=\active 8161} 8162 8163\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8164 \scanctxt 8165 \catcode`\{=\other 8166 \catcode`\}=\other 8167} 8168 8169% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8170% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8171% where N is the macro parameter number. 8172% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8173% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8174% 8175{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8176 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8177 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8178} 8179\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8180 8181\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8182 8183\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8184\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8185 8186\def\macroxxx#1{% 8187 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8188 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8189 \paramno=0\relax 8190 \else 8191 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8192 \if\paramno>256\relax 8193 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8194 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8195 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8196 \fi 8197 \fi 8198 \fi 8199 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8200 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8201 \else 8202 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8203 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8204 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8205 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8206 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8207 \fi 8208 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8209 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8210 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8211 \fi} 8212 8213\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8214 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8215 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8216 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8217 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8218 \begingroup 8219 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8220 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8221 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8222 \endgroup 8223 \else 8224 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8225 \fi 8226} 8227 8228% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8229% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8230% 8231\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8232 \ifx #1\relax 8233 % remove this 8234 \else 8235 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8236 \fi 8237} 8238 8239% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8240% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8241\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8242\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8243\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8244\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8245% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8246% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8247% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8248 8249% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8250% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8251% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8252% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8253% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8254% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8255% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8256% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8257% 8258% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8259% 8260% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8261% \parsemmanyargdef. 8262% 8263\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8264 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8265 \let\hash\relax 8266 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8267 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8268 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8269 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8270 \paramno0\relax 8271 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8272 \fi 8273} 8274\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8275 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8276 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8277 \advance\paramno by 1 8278 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8279 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 8280 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8281 \fi\next} 8282 8283% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8284% 8285% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8286% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8287% 8288% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8289% body to be transformed. 8290% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8291% 8292{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8293\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8294{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8295\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8296 8297% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8298\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8299\catcode `@=11\relax 8300 8301%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8302 8303% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8304% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8305% processed again to replace the arguments. 8306% 8307% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8308% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8309% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8310% 8311% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8312% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8313% 8314% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8315% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8316% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8317% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8318% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8319% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8320\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8321 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8322 \else 8323 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8324 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8325 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8326 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8327 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8328 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8329 % \xdef . 8330 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8331 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8332 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8333 \fi\next} 8334 8335 8336\let\endargs@\relax 8337\let\nil@\relax 8338\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8339\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8340 8341% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8342% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8343% macarg.ARGNAME 8344% 8345% #1 is the macro name 8346% #2 is the list of argument names 8347% #3 is the list of argument values 8348\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8349 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8350 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8351 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8352 \def\macroname{#1}% 8353 \begingroup 8354 \macroargctxt 8355 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8356 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8357 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8358 \setemptyargvalues@ 8359 \else 8360 \getargvals@@ 8361 \fi 8362} 8363\def\getargvals@@{% 8364 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8365 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8366 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8367 \else 8368 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8369 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8370 \fi 8371 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8372 \else 8373 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8374 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8375 % macros to empty. 8376 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8377 \else 8378 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8379 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8380 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8381 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8382 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8383 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8384 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8385 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8386 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8387 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8388 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8389 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8390 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8391 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8392 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8393 \fi 8394 \fi 8395 \next 8396} 8397 8398\def\push@#1#2{% 8399 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8400 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8401 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8402 \expandafter#1#2}% 8403} 8404 8405% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8406% in macro \@tempa. 8407% 8408\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8409 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8410 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8411 % values into respective token registers. 8412 % 8413 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8414 \begingroup 8415 \paramno0\relax 8416 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8417 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8418 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8419 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8420 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8421 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8422 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8423 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8424 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8425 % group. 8426 \expandafter 8427 \endgroup 8428 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8429 } 8430 8431% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8432% 8433\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8434 \expandafter 8435 \endgroup 8436 \macargdeflist@ 8437 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8438 % is in \@tempa . 8439 \macvalstoargs@ 8440 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8441 % with \@tempb . 8442 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8443 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8444 % \egroup . 8445 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8446 \let\@tempc\relax 8447 \else 8448 \let\@tempc\egroup 8449 \fi 8450 % And now we do the real job: 8451 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8452 \@tempd 8453} 8454 8455\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8456 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8457 \else 8458 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8459 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8460 % alias \@tempb . 8461 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8462 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8463 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8464 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8465 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8466 \fi 8467 \next 8468} 8469 8470% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8471% 8472\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8473 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8474 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8475 \else 8476 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8477 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8478 \fi 8479 \next 8480} 8481 8482\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8483 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8484 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8485 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8486 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8487} 8488 8489% #1 is the element target macro 8490% #2 is the list macro 8491% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8492\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8493 \def#1{#3}% 8494 \def#2{#4}% 8495} 8496\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8497 \long\def#1{#3}% 8498 \long\def#2{#4}% 8499} 8500 8501 8502%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8503 8504 8505% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8506% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8507% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8508% \paramno is the number of parameters 8509% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8510% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8511% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8512% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8513% 8514\def\defmacro{% 8515 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8516 \ifnum\paramno=1 8517 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8518 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8519 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8520 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8521 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8522 \else 8523 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8524 \fi 8525 \ifcase\paramno 8526 % 0 8527 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8528 \bgroup 8529 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8530 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8531 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8532 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8533 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8534 \egroup 8535 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8536 \or % 1 8537 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8538 \bgroup 8539 \noexpand\braceorline 8540 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8541 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8542 \egroup 8543 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8544 }% 8545 \else % at most 9 8546 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8547 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8548 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8549 % comma. 8550 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8551 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8552 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8553 \bgroup 8554 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8555 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8556 \noexpand\expandafter 8557 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8558 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8559 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8560 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8561 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8562 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8563 \expandafter\expandafter 8564 \expandafter\xdef 8565 \expandafter\expandafter 8566 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8567 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8568 \else % 10 or more: 8569 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8570 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8571 }% 8572 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8573 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8574 \fi 8575 \fi} 8576 8577\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8578 8579\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8580 8581 8582%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8583% 8584{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8585@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8586@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8587 8588% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8589% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8590% compressed to one. 8591% 8592% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8593% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8594% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8595% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8596% 8597% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8598% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8599% 8600% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8601% 8602% where: 8603% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8604% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8605% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8606% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8607 8608@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8609 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8610} 8611@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8612 8613% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8614% #2 - PENDING_BS 8615% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8616% #4 used to look ahead 8617% 8618% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8619% otherwise, remove the next token. 8620@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8621 @ifx#4\% 8622 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8623 @else 8624 @expandafter@add_segment 8625 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8626} 8627 8628% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8629% #2 - PENDING_BS 8630% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8631% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8632% #5 looks ahead 8633% 8634% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8635@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8636 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8637} 8638 8639@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8640 8641% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8642% #2 - PENDING_BS 8643% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8644% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8645% 8646% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8647% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8648% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8649% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8650% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8651% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8652% added to ARG_RESULT. 8653@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8654@ifx#3@_finish 8655 @call_the_macro#1!% 8656@else 8657 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8658 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8659 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8660 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8661 % long #4 is. 8662} 8663 8664% #1 - THE_MACRO 8665% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8666% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8667% conditional. 8668@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8669 8670} 8671%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8672 8673% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8674% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8675% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8676% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8677% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8678% 8679\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8680\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8681 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8682 \macroargctxt 8683 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8684 \else 8685 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8686 \fi \macnamexxx} 8687 8688 8689% @alias. 8690% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8691% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8692% 8693\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8694\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8695\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8696 {% 8697 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8698 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8699 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8700 }% 8701 \next 8702} 8703 8704 8705\message{cross references,} 8706 8707\newwrite\auxfile 8708\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8709\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8710 8711% @inforef is relatively simple. 8712\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8713\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8714 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8715 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8716 8717% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8718% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8719% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8720% @node foo , bar , ... 8721% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8722% 8723\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8724% 8725% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8726% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8727\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8728\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 8729 8730\let\nwnode=\node 8731\let\lastnode=\empty 8732 8733% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8734% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8735% 8736\def\donoderef#1{% 8737 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8738 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8739 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8740 \fi 8741} 8742 8743% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8744% 8745\newcount\savesfregister 8746% 8747\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8748\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8749\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8750 8751% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8752% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8753% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 8754% or the anchor name. 8755% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8756% empty for anchors. 8757% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8758% 8759% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8760% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8761% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8762% 8763\def\setref#1#2{% 8764 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8765 \iflinks 8766 {% 8767 \requireauxfile 8768 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8769 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8770 \def\value##1{##1}% 8771 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8772 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8773 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8774 }% 8775 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 8776 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8777 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8778 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8779 }% 8780 \fi 8781} 8782 8783% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8784% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8785% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8786% variable, now it's official. 8787% 8788\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8789 \def\temp{#1}% 8790 \ifx\temp\onword 8791 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8792 = \empty 8793 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8794 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8795 = \relax 8796 \else 8797 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8798 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8799 must be on|off}% 8800 \fi\fi 8801} 8802 8803% 8804% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8805% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8806% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8807% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8808% 8809\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8810\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8811\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8812 8813\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8814\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8815% 8816\newbox\toprefbox 8817\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8818\newbox\infofilenamebox 8819\newbox\printedmanualbox 8820% 8821\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8822 \unsepspaces 8823 % 8824 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8825 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8826 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8827 % 8828 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8829 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8830 % 8831 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8832 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8833 % 8834 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8835 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8836 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8837 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8838 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8839 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8840 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8841 \else 8842 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8843 % the square brackets if we have it. 8844 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8845 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8846 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8847 \else 8848 \ifhavexrefs 8849 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8850 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 8851 \else 8852 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8853 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8854 \fi% 8855 \fi 8856 \fi 8857 \fi 8858 % 8859 % Make link in pdf output. 8860 \ifpdf 8861 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8862 {\indexnofonts 8863 \makevalueexpandable 8864 \turnoffactive 8865 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8866 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8867 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8868 \getfilename{#4}% 8869 % 8870 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8871 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8872 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8873 % 8874 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8875 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8876 \fi 8877 % 8878 \leavevmode 8879 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8880 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8881 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8882 \else 8883 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8884 \fi 8885 }% 8886 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8887 \else 8888 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8889 \else 8890 % For XeTeX 8891 {\indexnofonts 8892 \makevalueexpandable 8893 \turnoffactive 8894 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8895 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8896 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8897 \getfilename{#4}% 8898 % 8899 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8900 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8901 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8902 % 8903 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8904 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8905 \fi 8906 % 8907 \leavevmode 8908 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8909 % With default settings, 8910 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8911 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8912 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8913 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8914 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8915 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8916 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8917 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8918 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8919 \else 8920 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8921 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8922 \fi 8923 }% 8924 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8925 \fi 8926 \fi 8927 {% 8928 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8929 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8930 \indexnofonts 8931 \turnoffactive 8932 \def\value##1{##1}% 8933 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8934 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8935 }% 8936 % 8937 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8938 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 8939 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 8940 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8941 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8942 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8943 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8944 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 8945 \else 8946 \printedrefname 8947 \fi 8948 % 8949 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 8950 % "in MANUALNAME". 8951 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8952 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 8953 \fi 8954 \else 8955 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 8956 % 8957 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 8958 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 8959 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 8960 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 8961 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 8962 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8963 % 8964 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8965 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8966 % 8967 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8968 % 8969 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8970 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8971 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8972 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8973 % 8974 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8975 % 8976 \else 8977 % Reference within this manual. 8978 % 8979 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 8980 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 8981 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 8982 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 8983 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 8984 {\turnoffactive 8985 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 8986 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 8987 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 8988 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8989 }% 8990 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8991 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8992 % 8993 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8994 ,\space 8995 % 8996 % output the `page 3'. 8997 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 8998 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 8999 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 9000 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 9001 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 9002 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 9003 \else\ifx\ 9004 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 9005 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 9006 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 9007 \fi\fi 9008 \fi 9009 \endlink 9010\endgroup} 9011 9012% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 9013% 9014% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 9015% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 9016% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 9017% 9018% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 9019% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 9020% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 9021% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 9022% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 9023% 9024% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 9025% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 9026% 9027\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 9028 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 9029 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 9030 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 9031 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 9032 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 9033 \fi 9034 \fi 9035 #1% 9036} 9037 9038% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 9039% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 9040% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9041% one that Bob is working on :). 9042% 9043\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9044 9045% Things referred to by \setref. 9046% 9047\def\Ynothing{} 9048\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9049\def\Ynumbered{% 9050 \ifnum\secno=0 9051 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9052 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9053 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9054 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9055 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9056 \else 9057 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9058 \fi\fi\fi 9059} 9060\def\Yappendix{% 9061 \ifnum\secno=0 9062 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9063 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9064 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9065 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9066 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9067 \else 9068 \putwordSection@tie 9069 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9070 \fi\fi\fi 9071} 9072 9073% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX 9074% is output afterwards if non-empty. 9075\def\refx#1#2{% 9076 \requireauxfile 9077 {% 9078 \indexnofonts 9079 \otherbackslash 9080 \def\value##1{##1}% 9081 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9082 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9083 }% 9084 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9085 % If not defined, say something at least. 9086 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9087 \iflinks 9088 \ifhavexrefs 9089 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9090 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9091 \else 9092 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9093 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9094 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9095 \fi 9096 \fi 9097 \fi 9098 \else 9099 % It's defined, so just use it. 9100 \thisrefX 9101 \fi 9102 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 9103} 9104 9105% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9106% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9107% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9108% type, we have more work to do. 9109% 9110\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9111 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9112 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9113 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9114 \indexnofonts 9115 \turnoffactive 9116 \def\value##1{##1}% 9117 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9118 }% 9119 % 9120 \bgroup 9121 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% 9122 \egroup 9123 % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 9124 % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 9125 % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does 9126 % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 9127 % 9128 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9129 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9130 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9131 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9132 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9133 % 9134 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9135 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9136 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9137 \else 9138 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9139 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9140 \fi 9141 % 9142 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9143 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9144 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9145 {\safexrefname}}% 9146 \fi 9147} 9148 9149% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9150% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9151% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9152% 9153\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9154\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9155 9156% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9157\def\requireauxfile{% 9158 \iflinks 9159 \tryauxfile 9160 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9161 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9162 \fi 9163 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9164} 9165 9166% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9167% 9168\def\tryauxfile{% 9169 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9170 \ifeof 1 \else 9171 \readdatafile{aux}% 9172 \global\havexrefstrue 9173 \fi 9174 \closein 1 9175} 9176 9177\def\setupdatafile{% 9178 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9179 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9180 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9181 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9182 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9183 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9184 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9185 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9186 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9187 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9188 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9189 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9190 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9191 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9192 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9193 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9194 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9195 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9196 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9197 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9198 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9199 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9200 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9201 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9202 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9203 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9204 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9205 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 9206 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 9207 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 9208 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 9209 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 9210 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 9211 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 9212 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 9213 % 9214 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 9215 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 9216 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 9217 % 9218 \catcode`\^=\other 9219 % 9220 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9221 \catcode`\~=\other 9222 \catcode`\[=\other 9223 \catcode`\]=\other 9224 \catcode`\"=\other 9225 \catcode`\_=\other 9226 \catcode`\|=\other 9227 \catcode`\<=\other 9228 \catcode`\>=\other 9229 \catcode`\$=\other 9230 \catcode`\#=\other 9231 \catcode`\&=\other 9232 \catcode`\%=\other 9233 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9234 % 9235 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 9236 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 9237 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 9238 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 9239 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 9240 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 9241 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 9242 \catcode`\\=\other 9243 % 9244 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9245 \catcode`\{=1 9246 \catcode`\}=2 9247 \catcode`\@=0 9248} 9249 9250\def\readdatafile#1{% 9251\begingroup 9252 \setupdatafile 9253 \input\jobname.#1 9254\endgroup} 9255 9256 9257\message{insertions,} 9258% including footnotes. 9259 9260\newcount \footnoteno 9261 9262% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9263% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9264% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9265% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9266% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9267\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9268 9269% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9270\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9271 9272{\catcode `\@=11 9273% 9274% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9275\gdef\footnote{% 9276 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9277 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9278 % 9279 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9280 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9281 \let\@sf\empty 9282 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9283 % 9284 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9285 \unskip 9286 \thisfootno\@sf 9287 \dofootnote 9288}% 9289 9290% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9291% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9292% 9293% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9294% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9295% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9296% 9297\gdef\dofootnote{% 9298 \insert\footins\bgroup 9299 % 9300 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9301 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9302 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9303 % 9304 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9305 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9306 % So reset some parameters. 9307 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9308 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9309 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9310 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9311 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9312 \leftskip\z@skip 9313 \rightskip\z@skip 9314 \spaceskip\z@skip 9315 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9316 \parindent\defaultparindent 9317 % 9318 \smallfonts \rm 9319 % 9320 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9321 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9322 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9323 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9324 \let\noindent = \relax 9325 % 9326 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9327 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9328 \everypar = {\hang}% 9329 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9330 % 9331 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9332 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9333 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9334 \footstrut 9335 % 9336 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9337 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9338} 9339}%end \catcode `\@=11 9340 9341\def\errfootnotenest{% 9342 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9343 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9344 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9345} 9346 9347\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9348 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9349 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9350} 9351 9352% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9353% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9354% would be lost. 9355% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9356% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9357% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9358% 9359% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9360% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9361% out prematurely. 9362% 9363\def\startsavinginserts{% 9364 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9365 \let\insert\saveinsert 9366 \else 9367 \let\checkinserts\relax 9368 \fi 9369} 9370 9371% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9372% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9373% 9374\def\saveinsert#1{% 9375 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9376 \afterassignment\next 9377 % swallow the left brace 9378 \let\temp = 9379} 9380\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9381\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9382 9383\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9384 9385\def\placesaveins#1{% 9386 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9387 {\box#1}% 9388} 9389 9390% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9391{ 9392 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9393 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9394} 9395 9396% initialization: 9397\def\newsaveins #1{% 9398 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9399 \next 9400} 9401\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9402 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9403 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9404 \checksaveins #1}% 9405} 9406 9407% initialize: 9408\let\checkinserts\empty 9409\newsaveins\footins 9410\newsaveins\margin 9411 9412 9413% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9414% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9415% 9416% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9417% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9418% undone and the next image would fail. 9419\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9420\ifeof 1 \else 9421 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9422 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9423 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9424 \input epsf.tex 9425\fi 9426\closein 1 9427% 9428% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9429\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9430\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9431 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9432 it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.} 9433% 9434\def\image#1{% 9435 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9436 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9437 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9438 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9439 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9440 \fi 9441 \else 9442 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9443 \fi 9444} 9445% 9446% Arguments to @image: 9447% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9448% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9449% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9450% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9451% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9452\newif\ifimagevmode 9453\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9454 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9455 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9456 \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro 9457 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9458 \ifvmode 9459 \imagevmodetrue 9460 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9461 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9462 \imagevmodetrue 9463 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9464 \fi\fi 9465 % 9466 \ifimagevmode 9467 \nobreak\medskip 9468 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9469 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9470 % above and below. 9471 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9472 \nobreak 9473 \fi 9474 % 9475 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9476 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9477 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9478 % normal paragraph indentation. 9479 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9480 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9481 % eradicate the centering. 9482 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 9483 % 9484 % Output the image. 9485 \ifpdf 9486 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9487 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9488 \else 9489 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9490 % For epsf.tex 9491 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9492 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9493 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9494 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9495 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9496 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9497 \else 9498 % For XeTeX 9499 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9500 \fi 9501 \fi 9502 % 9503 \ifimagevmode 9504 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9505 \fi 9506 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9507\endgroup} 9508 9509 9510% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9511% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9512% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9513% 9514\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9515 9516% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9517\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9518 9519% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9520% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9521% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9522% 9523% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9524% be referable. 9525% 9526% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9527% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9528% 9529% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9530% chapter-level command. 9531\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9532% 9533\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9534 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9535 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9536 % 9537 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9538 % 9539 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9540 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9541 % 9542 \startsavinginserts 9543 % 9544 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9545 \par 9546 % 9547 \vtop\bgroup 9548 \def\floattype{#1}% 9549 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9550 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9551 % 9552 \ifx\floattype\empty 9553 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9554 \else 9555 {% 9556 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9557 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9558 \indexnofonts 9559 \turnoffactive 9560 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9561 }% 9562 \fi 9563 % 9564 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9565 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9566 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9567 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9568 % 9569 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9570 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9571 % 9572 {% 9573 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 9574 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9575 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9576 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9577 % lists of floats. 9578 % 9579 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9580 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9581 }% 9582 \fi 9583 % 9584 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9585 \vskip\parskip 9586 % 9587 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9588 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9589} 9590 9591% we have these possibilities: 9592% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9593% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9594% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9595% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9596% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9597% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9598% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9599% @float & no caption: 9600% 9601\def\Efloat{% 9602 \let\floatident = \empty 9603 % 9604 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9605 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9606 % 9607 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9608 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9609 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9610 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9611 \fi 9612 % the number. 9613 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9614 \fi 9615 % 9616 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9617 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9618 \let\captionline = \floatident 9619 % 9620 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9621 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9622 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9623 \fi 9624 % 9625 % caption text. 9626 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9627 \fi 9628 % 9629 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9630 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9631 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9632 \vskip.5\parskip 9633 \captionline 9634 % 9635 % Space below caption. 9636 \vskip\parskip 9637 \fi 9638 % 9639 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9640 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9641 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9642 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9643 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9644 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9645 {% 9646 \requireauxfile 9647 \atdummies 9648 % 9649 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9650 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9651 \else 9652 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9653 \fi 9654 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9655 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9656 }% 9657 \fi 9658 \egroup % end of \vtop 9659 % 9660 \checkinserts 9661} 9662 9663% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9664% 9665\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9666 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9667} 9668 9669% @caption, @shortcaption 9670% 9671\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9672\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9673\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9674\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9675 9676% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9677% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9678\def\getfloatno#1{% 9679 \ifx#1\relax 9680 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9681 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9682 % 9683 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9684 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9685 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9686 \fi 9687 \let\floatno#1% 9688} 9689 9690% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9691% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9692% first read the @float command. 9693% 9694\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9695 9696% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9697% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9698\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9699 9700% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9701% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9702% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 9703% 9704\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9705% 9706% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9707% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9708% 9709\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9710 \def\temp{#1}% 9711 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9712 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9713} 9714 9715% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9716% 9717\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9718 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9719 {% 9720 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9721 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9722 \indexnofonts 9723 \turnoffactive 9724 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9725 }% 9726 % 9727 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9728 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9729 \ifhavexrefs 9730 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9731 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9732 \fi 9733 \else 9734 \begingroup 9735 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9736 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9737 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9738 \endgroup 9739 \fi 9740} 9741 9742% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9743% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9744% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9745% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9746% 9747% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9748% they won't appear in the aux file). 9749% 9750\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9751\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9752 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9753 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9754 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9755 % in pdf output. 9756 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9757 % 9758 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9759 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9760 \writeentry 9761}} 9762 9763 9764\message{localization,} 9765 9766% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9767% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9768% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9769% 9770{ 9771 \catcode`\_ = \active 9772 \globaldefs=1 9773\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9774 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9775 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9776 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9777 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9778 \ifeof 1 9779 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9780 \else 9781 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9782 \input txi-#1.tex 9783 \fi 9784 \closein 1 9785 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9786} 9787% 9788% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9789% try txi-de.tex. 9790% 9791\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9792 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9793 \ifeof 1 9794 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9795 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9796 \else 9797 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9798 \input txi-#1.tex 9799 \fi 9800 \closein 1 9801} 9802}% end of special _ catcode 9803% 9804\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9805is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9806directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9807 9808% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9809% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9810% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9811% 9812% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9813% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9814% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9815% 9816% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9817% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9818% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9819% accented characters problem.) 9820% 9821\catcode`@=11 9822\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9823 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9824 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9825 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9826 \else 9827 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9828 \fi 9829 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9830 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9831 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9832} 9833 9834% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9835% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9836% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9837% 9838\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9839\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9840 9841\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9842 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9843 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9844 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9845 \else 9846 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9847 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9848 \fi 9849\else 9850 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9851 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9852\fi 9853 9854% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9855% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9856% 9857\def\setbytewiseio{% 9858 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9859 \else 9860 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9861 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9862 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9863 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9864 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9865 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9866 \fi 9867 9868 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9869 \else 9870 \directlua{ 9871 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9872 local function convert_char (char) 9873 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9874 end 9875 9876 local function convert_line (line) 9877 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9878 end 9879 9880 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9881 9882 local function convert_line_out (line) 9883 local line_out = "" 9884 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9885 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9886 end 9887 return line_out 9888 end 9889 9890 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9891 } 9892 \fi 9893 9894 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9895} 9896 9897 9898% Helpers for encodings. 9899% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9900% 9901\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9902 \count255=128 9903 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9904 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9905 \advance\count255 by 1 9906 \repeat 9907} 9908 9909\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9910 \count255=128 9911 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9912 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9913 \advance\count255 by 1 9914 \repeat 9915} 9916 9917% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9918% according to the specified encoding. 9919% 9920\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9921\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9922 % 9923 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9924 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9925 % 9926 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9927 % to compare them with \ifx. 9928 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9929 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9930 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9931 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9932 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9933 % 9934 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9935 \asciichardefs 9936 % 9937 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9938 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9939 \setbytewiseio 9940 \fi 9941 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9942 \lattwochardefs 9943 % 9944 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 9945 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9946 \setbytewiseio 9947 \fi 9948 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9949 \latonechardefs 9950 % 9951 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 9952 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9953 \setbytewiseio 9954 \fi 9955 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9956 \latninechardefs 9957 % 9958 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9959 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9960 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 9961 \nativeunicodechardefs 9962 \else 9963 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 9964 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9965 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 9966 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 9967 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 9968 % sufficient. 9969 \fi 9970 % 9971 \else 9972 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 9973 % 9974 \fi % utfeight 9975 \fi % latnine 9976 \fi % latone 9977 \fi % lattwo 9978 \fi % ascii 9979 % 9980 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9981 \else 9982 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9983 \else 9984 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9985 \else 9986 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 9987 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 9988 \fi 9989 \fi 9990 \fi 9991} 9992 9993% emacs-page 9994% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 9995% the default font encoding (OT1). 9996% 9997\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 9998 9999% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 10000\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 10001 10002% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 10003% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 10004% macros containing the character definitions. 10005\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10006% 10007 10008\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 10009\gdef#1{% 10010 \ifpassthroughchars 10011 \string#1% 10012 \else 10013 #2% 10014 \fi 10015}} 10016 10017% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 10018\def\latonechardefs{% 10019 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10020 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 10021 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 10022 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 10023 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 10024 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 10025 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 10026 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10027 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10028 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 10029 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 10030 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 10031 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 10032 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10033 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 10034 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 10035 % 10036 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 10037 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 10038 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 10039 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 10040 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10041 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 10042 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 10043 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 10044 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10045 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 10046 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 10047 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 10048 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 10049 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 10050 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 10051 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 10052 % 10053 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 10054 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10055 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10056 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 10057 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10058 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 10059 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 10060 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10061 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 10062 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10063 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10064 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10065 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10066 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10067 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10068 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10069 % 10070 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10071 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10072 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10073 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10074 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10075 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10076 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10077 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10078 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10079 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10080 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10081 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10082 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10083 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10084 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10085 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10086 % 10087 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10088 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10089 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10090 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10091 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10092 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10093 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10094 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10095 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10096 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10097 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10098 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10099 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10100 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10101 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10102 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10103 % 10104 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10105 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10106 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10107 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10108 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10109 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10110 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10111 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10112 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10113 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10114 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10115 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10116 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10117 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10118 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10119 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10120} 10121 10122% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10123\def\latninechardefs{% 10124 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10125 \latonechardefs 10126 % 10127 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10128 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10129 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10130 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10131 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10132 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10133 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10134 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10135} 10136 10137% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10138\def\lattwochardefs{% 10139 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10140 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10141 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10142 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10143 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10144 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10145 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10146 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10147 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10148 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10149 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10150 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10151 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10152 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10153 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10154 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10155 % 10156 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10157 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10158 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10159 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10160 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10161 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10162 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10163 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10164 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10165 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10166 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10167 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10168 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10169 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10170 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10171 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10172 % 10173 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10174 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10175 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10176 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10177 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10178 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10179 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10180 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10181 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10182 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10183 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10184 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10185 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10186 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10187 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10188 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10189 % 10190 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10191 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10192 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10193 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10194 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10195 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10196 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10197 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10198 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10199 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10200 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10201 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10202 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10203 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10204 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10205 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10206 % 10207 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10208 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10209 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10210 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10211 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10212 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10213 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10214 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10215 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10216 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10217 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10218 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10219 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10220 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10221 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10222 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10223 % 10224 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10225 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10226 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10227 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10228 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10229 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10230 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10231 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10232 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10233 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10234 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10235 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10236 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10237 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10238 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10239 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10240} 10241 10242% UTF-8 character definitions. 10243% 10244% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10245% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10246% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10247% 10248\newcount\countUTFx 10249\newcount\countUTFy 10250\newcount\countUTFz 10251 10252\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10253 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10254% 10255\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10256 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10257% 10258\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10259 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10260 10261\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10262 \ifx #1\relax 10263 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10264 \else 10265 \expandafter #1% 10266 \fi 10267} 10268 10269% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10270\begingroup 10271 \catcode`\~13 10272 \catcode`\$12 10273 \catcode`\"12 10274 10275 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10276 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10277 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10278 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10279 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10280 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10281 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10282 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10283 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10284 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10285 \fi} 10286 10287 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10288 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10289 \countUTFx = "80 10290 \countUTFy = "C2 10291 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10292 \gdef~{% 10293 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10294 \UTFviiiLoop 10295 10296 \countUTFx = "C2 10297 \countUTFy = "E0 10298 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10299 \gdef~{% 10300 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10301 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10302 \UTFviiiLoop 10303 10304 \countUTFx = "E0 10305 \countUTFy = "F0 10306 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10307 \gdef~{% 10308 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10309 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10310 \UTFviiiLoop 10311 10312 \countUTFx = "F0 10313 \countUTFy = "F4 10314 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10315 \gdef~{% 10316 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10317 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10318 }}% 10319 \UTFviiiLoop 10320\endgroup 10321 10322\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10323 10324% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10325\def\U#1{% 10326 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10327 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10328 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10329 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10330 % letters are missing. 10331 \begingroup 10332 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10333 \uppercase{.} 10334 \endgroup 10335 \else 10336 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10337 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10338 \fi 10339 \else 10340 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10341 \fi 10342} 10343 10344% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10345% sequence to be defined. 10346\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10347 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10348\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10349 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10350\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10351 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10352 10353% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10354% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10355% this gets used by the @U command 10356% 10357\begingroup 10358 \catcode`\"=12 10359 \catcode`\<=12 10360 \catcode`\.=12 10361 \catcode`\,=12 10362 \catcode`\;=12 10363 \catcode`\!=12 10364 \catcode`\~=13 10365 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10366 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10367 \begingroup 10368 \parseXMLCharref 10369 10370 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10371 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10372 % 10373 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10374 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10375 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10376 % 10377 \expandafter\expandafter 10378 \expandafter\expandafter 10379 \expandafter\expandafter 10380 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10381 % 10382 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10383 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10384 \fi 10385 % 10386 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10387 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10388 \endgroup} 10389 % 10390 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10391 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10392 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10393 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10394 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10395 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10396 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10397 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10398 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10399 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10400 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10401 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10402 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10403 \else 10404 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10405 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10406 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10407 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10408 \fi\fi\fi 10409 } 10410 10411 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10412 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10413 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10414 % of the bytes. 10415 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10416 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10417 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10418 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10419 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10420 10421 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10422 % in order to get the last five bits. 10423 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10424 10425 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10426 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10427 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10428 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10429 10430 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10431 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10432 % sequence. 10433 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10434 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10435 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10436 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10437 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10438 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10439 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10440 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10441\endgroup 10442 10443% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10444% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10445% 10446\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10447 \catcode"#1=\other 10448} 10449 10450% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10451% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10452% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10453% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10454% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10455% 10456% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10457% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10458% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10459% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10460% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10461% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10462% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10463% 10464\def\unicodechardefs{% 10465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10481 % 10482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10498 % 10499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10515 % 10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10532 % 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10549 % 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10566 % 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10583 % 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10600 % 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10617 % 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10622 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10634 % 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10651 % 10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10668 % 10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10685 % 10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10702 % 10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10715 % 10716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10721 % 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10728 % 10729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10741 % 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10744 % 10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10751 % 10752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10755 % 10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10757 % 10758 % Greek letters upper case 10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10762 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10776 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10777 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10784 % 10785 % Vowels with accents 10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10788 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10789 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10792 % 10793 % Standalone accent 10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10795 % 10796 % Greek letters lower case 10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10798 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10799 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10822 % 10823 % More Greek vowels with accents 10824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10829 % 10830 % Variant Greek letters 10831 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10834 % 10835 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10839 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10840 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10842 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10845 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10847 % 10848 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10850 % 10851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10852 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10854 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10855 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10859 % 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10869 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10872 % 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10876 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10877 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10878 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10880 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10881 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10882 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10883 % 10884 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10885 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10886 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10888 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10889 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10890 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10893 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10894 % 10895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10896 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10898 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10899 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10900 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10901 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10902 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10905 % 10906 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10910 % 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10918 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10922 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10923 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10924 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10927 % 10928 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10929 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10932 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10936 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10938 % 10939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10941 % 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10943 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 10946 % 10947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 10949 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 10951 % 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 10953 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 10954 % 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 10956 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 10957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 10958 % 10959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 10960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 10961 % 10962 % Punctuation 10963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 10965 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 10966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 10967 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 10970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 10973 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 10975 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 10978 % 10979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 10980 % 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 10982 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 10983 % 10984 % Mathematical symbols 10985 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 10986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 10987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 10988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 10989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 10992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 10993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 10994 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 10996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 10997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 10999 % 11000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 11001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 11002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 11004 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 11006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 11007 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 11008 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 11009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 11013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 11016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 11017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 11023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 11024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 11026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 11029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 11030 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 11031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 11033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 11035 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 11038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 11039 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 11045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 11054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 11060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11061 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11064 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11065 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11066 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11067 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11068 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11069 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11070 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11071 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11072 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11073 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11074 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11075 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11076 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11077 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11078 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11079 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11080 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11081 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11082 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11083 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11084 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11085 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11086 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11087 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11088 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11089 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11090 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11091 % 11092 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11093 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11094 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11095 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11096 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11097 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11098 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11099 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11100 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11101 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11102 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11103 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11104 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11105 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11106 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11107 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11108 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11109 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11110 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11111 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11112 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11113 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11114 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11115 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11116 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11117 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11118 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11119 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11120 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11121 % 11122 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11123 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11124}% end of \unicodechardefs 11125 11126% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11127% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11128\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11129 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11130 \unicodechardefs 11131} 11132 11133% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11134% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11135% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11136% printing the correct glyphs. 11137\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11138\passthroughcharsfalse 11139 11140% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11141% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11142% 11143\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11144 \catcode"#1=\active 11145 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11146 \begingroup 11147 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11148 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11149 \ifpassthroughchars 11150 ##1% 11151 \else 11152 ##3% 11153 \fi 11154 } 11155 \endgroup 11156 } 11157 \begingroup 11158 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11159 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11160 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11161 \endgroup 11162} 11163 11164% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11165% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11166\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11167 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11168 \unicodechardefs 11169} 11170 11171% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11172% make the character token expand 11173% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11174\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11175 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11176 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11177} 11178 11179% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11180\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11181 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11182 \unicodechardefs 11183} 11184 11185% US-ASCII character definitions. 11186\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11187 \relax 11188} 11189 11190% define all Unicode characters we know about, for the sake of @U. 11191\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11192 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11193\else 11194 \utfeightchardefs 11195\fi 11196 11197 11198% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 11199% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 11200% document encoding. 11201% 11202\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 11203 11204 11205\message{formatting,} 11206 11207\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11208 11209\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11210\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11211\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11212 11213% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11214\vbadness = 10000 11215 11216% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11217\hbadness = 6666 11218 11219% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11220\widowpenalty=10000 11221\clubpenalty=10000 11222 11223% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11224% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11225% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11226% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11227% 11228\def\setemergencystretch{% 11229 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11230 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11231 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11232 \else 11233 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11234 \fi 11235} 11236 11237% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11238% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11239% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11240% 11241% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11242% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11243% 11244\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11245 \voffset = #3\relax 11246 \topskip = #6\relax 11247 \splittopskip = \topskip 11248 % 11249 \vsize = #1\relax 11250 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11251 \outervsize = \vsize 11252 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11253 \txipageheight = \vsize 11254 % 11255 \hsize = #2\relax 11256 \outerhsize = \hsize 11257 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11258 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11259 % 11260 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11261 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11262 % 11263 \ifpdf 11264 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11265 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11266 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11267 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11268 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11269 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11270 \else 11271 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11272 \special{papersize=#8,#7}% 11273 \else 11274 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11275 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11276 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11277 \fi 11278 \fi 11279 % 11280 \setleading{\textleading} 11281 % 11282 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11283 \setemergencystretch 11284} 11285 11286% @letterpaper (the default). 11287\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11288 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11289 \textleading = 13.2pt 11290 % 11291 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11292 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11293 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11294 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11295 {11in}{8.5in}% 11296}} 11297 11298% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11299\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11300 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11301 \textleading = 12pt 11302 % 11303 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11304 {-.2in}{0in}% 11305 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11306 {9.25in}{7in}% 11307 % 11308 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11309 \tolerance = 700 11310 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11311 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11312}} 11313 11314% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 11315% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 11316\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11317 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 11318 \textleading = 12pt 11319 % 11320 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 11321 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 11322 {0pt}{14pt}% 11323 {9in}{6in}% 11324 % 11325 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 11326 \tolerance = 700 11327 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11328 \defbodyindent = .4cm 11329}} 11330 11331% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11332\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11333 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11334 \textleading = 13.2pt 11335 % 11336 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11337 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11338 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11339 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11340 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11341 % your texinfo source file like this: 11342 % @tex 11343 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11344 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11345 % @end tex 11346 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11347 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11348 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11349 {297mm}{210mm}% 11350 % 11351 \tolerance = 700 11352 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11353 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11354}} 11355 11356% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11357% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 11358% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11359\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11360 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11361 \textleading = 12.5pt 11362 % 11363 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11364 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11365 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11366 {210mm}{148mm}% 11367 % 11368 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11369 \tolerance = 800 11370 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11371 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11372 \tableindent = 12mm 11373}} 11374 11375% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11376\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11377 \afourpaper 11378 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11379 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11380 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11381 {297mm}{210mm}% 11382 % 11383 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11384 \globaldefs = 0 11385}} 11386 11387% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11388\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11389 \afourpaper 11390 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11391 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11392 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11393 {297mm}{210mm}% 11394 \globaldefs = 0 11395}} 11396 11397% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11398% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11399% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11400% 11401\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11402\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11403 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11404 \globaldefs = 1 11405 % 11406 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11407 \setleading{\textleading}% 11408 % 11409 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11410 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 11411 \advance\dimen0 by 1in % reference point for DVI is 1 inch from top of page 11412 % 11413 \dimen2 = \hsize 11414 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 11415 \advance\dimen2 by 1in % reference point is 1 inch from left edge of page 11416 % 11417 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11418 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11419 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11420 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11421}} 11422 11423% Set default to letter. 11424% 11425\letterpaper 11426 11427% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes. 11428\hfuzz = 1pt 11429 11430 11431\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11432 11433\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11434 11435% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11436\catcode`\^^? = 14 11437 11438% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11439\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11440\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11441\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11442\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11443\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11444\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11445\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11446\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11447\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11448 11449% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11450% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11451% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11452% 11453% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11454% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11455% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11456% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11457% 11458\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11459 11460% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11461% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11462% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11463% this is not a problem. 11464\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11465 11466% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11467 11468% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11469% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11470% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11471% 11472\catcode`\"=\active 11473\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11474\let"=\activedoublequote 11475\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11476\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11477\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11478 11479\catcode`\_=\active 11480\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11481\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11482\let\realunder=_ 11483 11484\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11485 11486\chardef \less=`\< 11487\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11488\chardef \gtr=`\> 11489\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11490\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11491\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11492\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11493 11494 11495% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11496% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11497\def\texinfochars{% 11498 \let< = \activeless 11499 \let> = \activegtr 11500 \let~ = \activetilde 11501 \let^ = \activehat 11502 \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 11503 \let\b = \strong 11504 \let\i = \smartitalic 11505 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11506} 11507 11508% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11509% parsing them. 11510\def\turnoffactive{% 11511 \normalturnoffactive 11512 \otherbackslash 11513} 11514 11515\catcode`\@=0 11516 11517% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11518% as in \char`\\. 11519\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11520\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 11521 11522% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 11523% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 11524{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 11525 11526% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11527% in fixed width font. 11528\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11529 11530% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11531% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11532% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11533% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11534% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11535% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11536% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11537% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11538 11539@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11540@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11541 11542% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 11543% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11544% catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. 11545@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 11546@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11547 11548% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11549% the literal character `\'. 11550% 11551{@catcode`- = @active 11552 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11553 @passthroughcharstrue 11554 @let-=@normaldash 11555 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11556 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11557 @let+=@normalplus 11558 @let<=@normalless 11559 @let>=@normalgreater 11560 @let^=@normalcaret 11561 @let_=@normalunderscore 11562 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11563 @let~=@normaltilde 11564 @let\=@ttbackslash 11565 @markupsetuplqdefault 11566 @markupsetuprqdefault 11567 @unsepspaces 11568 } 11569} 11570 11571% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11572% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11573% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11574@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11575 11576% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11577% 11578% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11579% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11580% a backslash. 11581% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11582% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11583% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11584% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11585{ 11586@catcode`@^=7 11587@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11588 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11589 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11590 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11591 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11592 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11593 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11594 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11595 % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it 11596 @let@originalparsearg@parsearg 11597 @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg} 11598}} 11599 11600{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11601@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11602 11603% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11604% appears by mistake. 11605{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11606@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11607 @gdef^^M{% 11608 @par% 11609 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11610}}} 11611 11612 11613@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11614 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11615 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11616 @enableemergencynewline 11617 @let@c=@texinfoc 11618 @let@parsearg@originalparsearg 11619 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11620 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11621 @catcode`+=@active 11622 @catcode`@_=@active 11623 % 11624 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11625 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11626 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11627 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11628 % file for Texinfo. 11629 % 11630 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11631 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11632 @closein 1 11633} 11634 11635 11636% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11637@escapechar = `@@ 11638 11639% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11640% active definitions as the normal characters. 11641@def@normaldot{.} 11642@def@normalquest{?} 11643@def@normalslash{/} 11644 11645% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11646% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11647@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11648@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11649@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11650 11651@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11652 11653@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11654@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11655@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11656@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11657@catcode`@'=@active 11658@catcode`@`=@active 11659@markupsetuplqdefault 11660@markupsetuprqdefault 11661 11662@c Local variables: 11663@c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp) 11664@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11665@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 11666@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 11667@c time-stamp-end: "}" 11668@c End: 11669 11670@c vim:sw=2: 11671 11672@enablebackslashhack 11673
